huawei - ecc800 data center controller v100r003c00 ......implemented by hardware such as the ups and...

ECC800 Data Center ControllerV100R003C00

User Manual (for ECC800-Pro)

Issue 07

Date 2020-07-15

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2021. All rights reserved.

No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without priorwritten consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respectiveholders. NoticeThe purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei andthe customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not bewithin the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements,information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guaranteesor representations of any kind, either express or implied.

The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: https://e.huawei.com

Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. i

https://e.huawei.com

About This Document

PurposeThis document describes the ECC800-Pro data center controller in terms offeatures, devices, user interfaces (UIs), and power-on commissioning, as well asfrequently asked questions (FAQ) and troubleshooting measures.

This document describes all the functions of the ECC800-Pro. Certain functions areimplemented by hardware such as the UPS and PDU, and may be unavailable ifthe hardware is not connected to the ECC800-Pro.

The ECC800-Pro functions described in the user manual are applicable to multipleFusionModule solutions, and some functions may be applicable only to a fewFusionModule solutions. For details about the applicable ECC800-Pro functions,see the FusionModule solution documentation.

The figures provided in this document are for reference only.

This document applies to the ECC800-Pro data center controller. The softwareversion is ECC800 V100R003C00.

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

● Sales engineers● Technical support engineers● Maintenance engineers

Symbol ConventionsThe symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which, if notavoided, will result in death or serious injury.

Indicates a hazard with a medium level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in death or serious injury.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) About This Document

Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii

Symbol Description

Indicates a hazard with a low level of risk which, if notavoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if notavoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,performance deterioration, or unanticipated results.NOTICE is used to address practices not related to personalinjury.

Supplements the important information in the main text.NOTE is used to address information not related topersonal injury, equipment damage, and environmentdeterioration.

Change HistoryChanges between document issues are cumulative. The latest document issuecontains all updates made in previous issues.

Issue 07 (2020-07-15)

Added the access of the Envicool air conditioner and DC PDC in customizedprojects.

Issue 06 (2020-04-22)

Added sections about SmartLi, DC power supply, and NetCol5000-A035/A050access.

Issue 05 (2020-03-30)● Added the scenario where the door status sensor connects to the

FusionModule500 of the ECC800-Pro.● Added section "Infrared Remote Control Module."● Added the requirements for wireless mode and frequency bands in 4G

technical specifications.● Added the method of handling the problem that the ECC800 IP address is

forgotten.

Issue 04 (2020-01-20)

Updated the UI texts of the UIM20A expansion module.

Issue 03 (2019-12-20)

Added UIM20A expansion module.


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iii

Issue 02 (2019-12-06)● Added device connection and linkage operations in the FusionModule800

scenario.● Optimized sections about commissioning cameras.

Issue 01 (2019-07-20)This issue is the first official release.


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. iv

Contents

About This Document................................................................................................................ ii

1 Safety Information.................................................................................................................. 11.1 General Safety.......................................................................................................................................................................... 11.2 Personnel Requirements....................................................................................................................................................... 41.3 Electrical Safety........................................................................................................................................................................41.4 Installation Environment Requirements.......................................................................................................................... 61.5 Mechanical Safety................................................................................................................................................................... 81.6 Others....................................................................................................................................................................................... 10

2 Overview................................................................................................................................. 112.1 Positioning............................................................................................................................................................................... 112.2 Features.................................................................................................................................................................................... 11

3 Device Description................................................................................................................ 133.1 ECC800-Pro............................................................................................................................................................................. 133.1.1 Product Configuration......................................................................................................................................................133.1.2 Main Control Module....................................................................................................................................................... 153.1.3 Power Module.................................................................................................................................................................... 243.2 Southbound Device Introduction.....................................................................................................................................253.2.1 Rack Environment Unit....................................................................................................................................................253.2.2 Smart ETH Gateway......................................................................................................................................................... 273.2.3 Access Control System..................................................................................................................................................... 293.2.3.1 Aisle Access Control System....................................................................................................................................... 293.2.3.1.1 Access Actuator........................................................................................................................................................... 303.2.3.1.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad.....................................................................................................333.2.3.1.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader.................................................................................................................................. 343.2.3.1.4 Card Reader with a Keypad.....................................................................................................................................363.2.3.1.5 Magnetic Lock............................................................................................................................................................. 363.2.3.2 Cabinet Access Control System................................................................................................................................. 373.2.3.3 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock.................................................................................................................................... 393.2.4 AC Actuator......................................................................................................................................................................... 413.2.5 Skylight Actuator............................................................................................................................................................... 433.2.6 Multi-Functional Sensor.................................................................................................................................................. 463.2.7 Smoke Sensor..................................................................................................................................................................... 49

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) Contents

Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v

3.2.8 Temperature Sensor.......................................................................................................................................................... 493.2.9 Cabinet Temperature Sensor......................................................................................................................................... 503.2.10 Alarm Beacon................................................................................................................................................................... 513.2.11 (Optional) Smart U Space Manager........................................................................................................................ 523.2.12 eLight Actuator................................................................................................................................................................ 533.2.13 Water Sensor.................................................................................................................................................................... 543.2.13.1 WLDS600 Water Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 543.2.13.2 WLDS900 Water Sensor............................................................................................................................................ 563.2.13.3 Electrode Water Sensor............................................................................................................................................. 573.2.14 WiFi Module......................................................................................................................................................................573.2.15 ETH Converter.................................................................................................................................................................. 593.2.16 PAD...................................................................................................................................................................................... 603.2.17 T/H Sensor......................................................................................................................................................................... 623.2.17.1 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)............................................................................................................... 623.2.17.2 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS).............................................................................................................. 643.2.17.3 Ambient T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010516)............................................................................................. 653.2.17.4 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)..............................................................................................................663.2.17.5 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)............................................................................................................... 673.2.18 Infrared Remote Control Module.............................................................................................................................. 683.2.19 Intelligent Battery Monitoring System.................................................................................................................... 683.2.19.1 iBOX.................................................................................................................................................................................. 693.2.19.2 iBAT.................................................................................................................................................................................. 79

4 UI Description.........................................................................................................................824.1 WebUI....................................................................................................................................................................................... 824.2 Mobile Phone App................................................................................................................................................................ 894.3 Pad App.................................................................................................................................................................................... 90

5 Power-On Commissioning................................................................................................... 925.1 Preparations and WebUI Login........................................................................................................................................ 925.2 Performing Startup Password Authentication (for FusionModule800)............................................................. 955.3 Commissioning Configuration Wizard........................................................................................................................... 975.4 Configuring Event Notification.........................................................................................................................................985.5 Commissioning the New Main Way.............................................................................................................................1055.6 Commissioning the eLight............................................................................................................................................... 1075.7 Commissioning the eLight (for FusionModule800)................................................................................................1105.8 Commissioning the PDU2000 (for FusionModule800)..........................................................................................1125.9 Commissioning Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock (for FusionModule800).......................................................... 115

6 Feature Description............................................................................................................ 1196.1 Setting Device Performance Parameters.................................................................................................................... 1196.2 Setting ECC800-Pro Cascading.......................................................................................................................................1206.3 Access Management..........................................................................................................................................................1216.3.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor......................................................................................................................121


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vi

6.3.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI port on the IndependentDeployment AI_DI Unit).......................................................................................................................................................... 1216.3.1.2 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the Rack Environment Unit)......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 1226.3.1.3 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the UIM20A ExpansionModule)........................................................................................................................................................................................ 1236.3.1.4 Commissioning the Door Status Sensor (Connected to the ECC800-Pro)...............................................1246.3.2 Commissioning an Access Control Device and a Cabinet Electronic Lock or Fingerprint Lock............1266.3.3 Commissioning the Exit Button, Skylight Button, Atmosphere Light, Emergency Button, andMagnetic Lock.............................................................................................................................................................................1316.3.4 Commissioning an Emergency Door Release Button......................................................................................... 1336.4 Video Management........................................................................................................................................................... 1336.4.1 Reference Documentation........................................................................................................................................... 1336.4.2 Networking Scenarios....................................................................................................................................................1346.4.3 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario).....................................................1356.4.3.1 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera..................................................................................................................... 1356.4.3.2 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)......................................................................... 1426.4.3.3 Commissioning a C3220 Camera........................................................................................................................... 1456.4.3.4 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)............................................................................... 1526.4.4 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch Networking Scenario)...................................................................... 1546.4.4.1 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera..................................................................................................................... 1546.4.4.2 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)......................................................................... 1586.4.4.3 Commissioning a C3220 Camera........................................................................................................................... 1606.4.4.4 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)............................................................................... 1676.4.5 Initializing VCN510 Disks............................................................................................................................................. 1706.4.6 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI.................................................................................................................. 1726.4.7 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client.............................................................................................................1756.5 Linkage Control................................................................................................................................................................... 1786.5.1 FusionModule2000 Linkage Control.........................................................................................................................1786.5.1.1 Fire Control Linkage....................................................................................................................................................1806.5.1.2 High Temperature Linkage....................................................................................................................................... 1826.5.1.3 (Optional) Commissioning an Intelligent Aisle Light..................................................................................... 1836.5.1.4 Setting Link Smoke Alarm with Skylight Open.................................................................................................1866.5.2 FusionModule800 Linkage Control........................................................................................................................... 1886.5.2.1 Link Air Conditioner Fault with Emergency Fan............................................................................................... 1906.5.2.2 Link Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open...................................................................... 1916.5.2.3 Link Fire Control with Lock Open.......................................................................................................................... 1926.6 Infrared Remote Control Module Control and Management............................................................................. 1936.6.1 Connecting a Communications Cable...................................................................................................................... 1936.6.2 Setting and Adding an Infrared Remote Control Module.................................................................................1936.6.3 Control Function of an Infrared Remote Control Module................................................................................ 1956.7 PUE Configuration..............................................................................................................................................................1966.7.1 Configuring PUE Standard Mode.............................................................................................................................. 197


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii

6.7.2 Configuring PUE User-defined Mode....................................................................................................................... 1986.7.3 Viewing PUE......................................................................................................................................................................2006.8 Battery Management........................................................................................................................................................ 2016.8.1 Setting iBOX and iBAT Parameters........................................................................................................................... 2016.8.2 Networking iBOXs and iBATs in Wireless Mode...................................................................................................2026.8.3 Battery Shallow Discharge Test..................................................................................................................................2036.9 Asset Management............................................................................................................................................................ 2056.9.1 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager (Connected to a Rack Environment Unit)..................... 2056.9.1.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager........................................................................... 2056.9.1.2 Querying the U Space Use Information...............................................................................................................2066.9.2 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager (Connected to a UIM20A Expansion Module)............. 2066.9.2.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager........................................................................... 2066.9.2.2 Querying the U Space Use Information...............................................................................................................2076.10 Power Management........................................................................................................................................................2086.10.1 Configuring Power Management Parameters.................................................................................................... 2086.10.2 Setting Fault Isolation Parameters......................................................................................................................... 2116.10.3 Viewing the Power Usage..........................................................................................................................................2116.10.4 Viewing the Power Supply Links Diagram........................................................................................................... 2126.11 Cooling Capacity Management...................................................................................................................................2146.11.1 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters.................................................................................... 2146.11.2 Viewing Cooling Capacity Usage Information....................................................................................................2166.11.3 Viewing the Cooling Links Diagram.......................................................................................................................2166.11.4 Setting the Temperature Map.................................................................................................................................. 2196.12 Facial Recognition............................................................................................................................................................ 2216.12.1 Recording Facial Data................................................................................................................................................. 2216.12.2 Collecting and Importing Facial Data in Offline Mode................................................................................... 2226.12.3 Opening the Access Control System Using Facial Recognition.....................................................................2236.12.4 Maintaining the Facial Data..................................................................................................................................... 2236.13 Remote Management.....................................................................................................................................................2246.13.1 NetEco Management.................................................................................................................................................. 2246.13.1.1 Connecting a Communications Cable................................................................................................................ 2246.13.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters.................................................................................................................................... 2246.13.1.3 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco............................................................................................................ 2266.13.1.4 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the CloudOpera NetEco................................................................................... 2276.13.1.5 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function..............................................................................................2276.13.2 Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP).................................................................................................... 2306.13.2.1 Connecting a Communications Cable................................................................................................................ 2306.13.2.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters.......................................................................................................... 2306.14 Setting Other Parameters and Channel Security.................................................................................................. 232

7 Maintenance.........................................................................................................................2357.1 Routine Maintenance........................................................................................................................................................ 2357.2 Common Faults and Troubleshooting......................................................................................................................... 236


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. viii

7.3 Component Replacement................................................................................................................................................ 2397.3.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module................................................................................................. 2397.3.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU....................................................................................................................................2417.3.3 Replacing ECC800-Pro Antennas............................................................................................................................... 2427.3.4 Replacing a SIM Card.................................................................................................................................................... 242

8 FAQ......................................................................................................................................... 2448.1 WebUI Operations.............................................................................................................................................................. 2448.1.1 How Can I View Version Information?.................................................................................................................... 2448.1.2 How Can I Upgrade the ECC800-Pro Software Version?...................................................................................2448.1.3 How Can I Set the Date and Time?.......................................................................................................................... 2458.1.4 How Can I Check the System Type and Set the Smart Module Name?...................................................... 2458.1.5 How Can I Manage WebUI Users?............................................................................................................................2468.1.6 How Do I Create a Smart Module Plan View?......................................................................................................2498.1.7 How Can I Set and Add Devices?.............................................................................................................................. 2518.1.7.1 How Can I Set Integrated UPS Parameters (Modbus-TCP)?.........................................................................2518.1.7.2 How Can I Set and Add a UPS2000G-A (Modbus-RTU)?..............................................................................2528.1.7.3 How Can I Set and Add a UPS5000 (Modbus-RTU)?..................................................................................... 2548.1.7.4 How Can I Set and Add a UPS5000 (Modbus-TCP)?.......................................................................................2558.1.7.5 How Can I Set and Add a PDU8000 or Integrated PDU (over Modbus-TCP)?.......................................2568.1.7.6 How Can I Set and Add an Envicool Air Conditioner (Modbus-RTU)?..................................................... 2568.1.7.7 How Can I Set and Add a DC PDF (Modbus-RTU)?........................................................................................ 2588.1.7.8 How Can I Set and Add a PDU8000 (Modbus RTU)? (C41).........................................................................2598.1.7.9 How Do I Set and Add an rPDU?........................................................................................................................... 2618.1.7.10 How Can I Set and Add an ATS?......................................................................................................................... 2648.1.7.11 How Do I Set and Add a PMAC615 AC Meter?.............................................................................................. 2658.1.7.12 How Do I Set and Add a PMAC625 AC Meter?.............................................................................................. 2678.1.7.13 How Can I Set and Add a PDC DC Meter?....................................................................................................... 2698.1.7.14 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-A011/A025/A035/A042/A050 (Modbus-TCP)?....................2708.1.7.15 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 (Modbus-MAC)?................................................................ 2718.1.7.16 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-C(030, 032)/NetCol5000-C(065, 080) Parameters (overModbus TCP)?............................................................................................................................................................................. 2728.1.7.17 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 (Modbus RTU)?.................................................................. 2738.1.7.18 How Can I Set and Add an IP Device?............................................................................................................... 2758.1.7.19 How Can I Set and Add an Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit?......................................................... 2768.1.7.20 How Can I Set and Add a UIM20A Expansion Module (Modbus-TCP)?................................................ 2778.1.7.21 How Can I Set and Add a Multi-functional Sensor?..................................................................................... 2788.1.7.22 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the ECC800-Pro)?. 2808.1.7.23 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the SkylightActuator)?.................................................................................................................................................................................... 2828.1.7.24 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the Rack EnvironmentUnit)?............................................................................................................................................................................................. 2838.1.7.25 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the UIM20Aexpansion module)?................................................................................................................................................................. 284


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix

8.1.7.26 How Can I Set and Add the WLDS900 Water Sensor?................................................................................ 2858.1.7.27 How Can I Set and Add a WLDS600 Water Sensor?.................................................................................... 2868.1.7.28 How Can I Set and Add an Electrode Water Sensor?................................................................................... 2888.1.7.29 How Can I Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port on the ECC800-Pro)?............................................................................................................................................................................................... 2898.1.7.30 How Can I Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to the NTC Port on the RackEnvironment Unit)?...................................................................................................................................................................2908.1.7.31 How Can I Commission a Temperature Sensor (Connected to the NTC Port on the T/H Sensor)?......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 2918.1.7.32 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010516)?....................................................... 2928.1.7.33 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS)?...................................................... 2948.1.7.34 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG/02312PBL)?.................................2968.1.8 How Can I Restore Factory Settings?....................................................................................................................... 2988.1.9 How Can I Install a Network Security Certificate?.............................................................................................. 2998.1.10 How Can I Install a Device Access Certificate?...................................................................................................2998.1.11 How Can I Change the ECC800-Pro IP Address on the WebUI?.................................................................. 3008.1.12 How Can I Configure ECC800-Pro Alarm Parameters?....................................................................................3008.1.13 How Can I View Real-Time Monitoring Data, Active Alarms, Historical Alarms, Access Event, andOperation Logs?......................................................................................................................................................................... 3018.1.14 How Can I Handle Alarms?....................................................................................................................................... 3028.1.15 How Can I View Performance Data?..................................................................................................................... 3028.1.16 How Can I Change a Signal Name?....................................................................................................................... 3038.1.17 How Can I Export Historical Data and Device Data?.......................................................................................3038.1.18 How Can I Export or Import a Configuration File?........................................................................................... 3048.1.19 How Can I Export Fault Information?....................................................................................................................3058.1.20 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?.......................................................................................................3068.1.21 What Should I Do If the ECC800-Pro WebUI Display Language Changes from Chinese to EnglishDuring Use?................................................................................................................................................................................. 3078.1.22 What Should I Do If the ECC800-Pro Fails to Communicate with the UPS5000-E?..............................3078.1.23 What Should I Do if I Forget the ECC800 IP Address?.....................................................................................3078.1.24 What Should I Do If a Message Indicating Unauthorized Fingerprint Is Displayed DuringFingerprint Scanning on the Access Control Device (Fingerprint Has Been Recorded)?..................................3088.1.25 How Can I Rectify Camera Access Restriction?.................................................................................................. 3088.1.26 How Can I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart ETH Gateway to the ECC800-Pro WebUI(Modbus-TCP)?........................................................................................................................................................................... 3098.1.27 How Can I Add the Devices Accessed Through a Smart ETH Gateway to the ECC800-Pro WebUI(Modbus-MAC)?........................................................................................................................................................................ 3108.1.28 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ETH Converter to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?............. 3128.1.29 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800-Pro COM Port to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3138.1.30 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800-Pro AI/DI Port to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 3158.1.31 How Can I Add an RS485 Device Connected to the ECC800-Pro Through a UIM20A?....................... 3178.1.32 How Can I Add a Dry Contact Device Connected to the ECC800-Pro Through a UIM20A ExpansionModule?........................................................................................................................................................................................ 318


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x

8.1.33 How Can I Open Doors Remotely over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?................................................................3198.1.34 How Can I Turn On or Off Aisle Lights in the Smart Module over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?............3208.1.35 How Can I Open Skylights Remotely over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?..........................................................3218.1.36 How Can I Turn On or Off Smart Cooling Products over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?.............................. 3238.1.37 How Can I Open the Cabinet Electronic Lock over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?..........................................3238.1.38 How Can I Link the Smoke Alarm with the Alarm Beacon over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?.................3248.1.39 How Can I Link the AI/DI Alarm with the Alarm Beacon over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?....................3258.1.40 How Can I Modify Device Names over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?................................................................ 3268.2 APP Operations................................................................................................................................................................... 3268.2.1 How Can I Connect to a WiFi Network?................................................................................................................. 3268.2.2 How Can I Prepare and Log In to the App?...........................................................................................................3278.2.3 How Can I Ensure that Device Positions in the Plan View Are Consistent with Actual Positions?.....3298.2.4 How Can I View Real-time Data?..............................................................................................................................3308.2.5 How Can I Export and Import Data?........................................................................................................................3308.2.6 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?......................................................................................................... 3318.2.7 How Can I Handle App Login Failure?.................................................................................................................... 332

9 PLC Function.........................................................................................................................3339.1 Linkage Control Introduction......................................................................................................................................... 3339.2 Linkage Control Configuration Examples...................................................................................................................334

10 Acronyms and Abbreviations......................................................................................... 337


Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi

1 Safety Information

1.1 General Safety

StatementBefore installing, operating, and maintaining the equipment, read this documentand observe all the safety instructions on the equipment and in this document.

The "NOTICE", "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" statements in thisdocument do not cover all the safety instructions. They are only supplements tothe safety instructions. Huawei will not be liable for any consequence caused bythe violation of general safety requirements or design, production, and usagesafety standards.

Ensure that the equipment is used in environments that meet its designspecifications. Otherwise, the equipment may become faulty, and the resultingequipment malfunction, component damage, personal injuries, or propertydamage are not covered under the warranty.

Follow local laws and regulations when installing, operating, or maintaining theequipment. The safety instructions in this document are only supplements to locallaws and regulations.

Huawei will not be liable for any consequences of the following circumstances:

● Operation beyond the conditions specified in this document● Installation or use in environments which are not specified in relevant

international or national standards● Unauthorized modifications to the product or software code or removal of the

product● Failure to follow the operation instructions and safety precautions on the

product and in this document● Equipment damage due to force majeure, such as earthquakes, fire, and

storms● Damage caused during transportation by the customer● Storage conditions that do not meet the requirements specified in this

document

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 1 Safety Information

Issue 07 (2020-07-15) Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 1

General Requirements● Do not install, use, or operate outdoor equipment and cables (including but

not limited to moving equipment, operating equipment and cables, insertingconnectors to or removing connectors from signal ports connected to outdoorfacilities, working at heights, and performing outdoor installation) in harshweather conditions such as lightning, rain, snow, and level 6 or stronger wind.

● Before installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, remove anyconductive objects such as watches or metal jewelry like bracelets, bangles,and rings to avoid electric shock.

● When installing, operating, or maintaining the equipment, wear personalprotective equipment such as insulation gloves, goggles, and safety clothing,helmet, and shoes, as shown in the following figure.

● Follow the specified procedures for installation, operation, and maintenance.● Before handling a conductor surface or terminal, measure the contact point

voltage and ensure that there is no risk of electric shock.● After installing the equipment, remove idle packing materials such as cartons,

foam, plastics, and cable ties from the equipment area.● In the case of a fire, immediately leave the building or the equipment area,

and turn on the fire alarm bell or make an emergency call. Do not enter thebuilding on fire in any case.

● Do not stop using protective devices. Pay attention to the warnings, cautions,and related precautionary measures in this document and on the equipment.Promptly replace warning labels that have worn out.

● Keep irrelevant people away from the equipment. Only operators are allowedto access the equipment.

● Use insulated tools or tools with insulated handles, as shown in the followingfigure.



● All cable holes should be sealed. Seal the used cable holes with firestop putty.Seal the unused cable holes with the caps delivered with the cabinet. Thefollowing figure shows the criteria for correct sealing with firestop putty.

● Do not scrawl, damage, or block any warning label on the equipment.● When installing devices, use a torque wrench with a proper measurement

range to tighten bolts. Ensure that the wrench is not skewed and the torqueerror does not exceed 10%.

● Do not work with power on during installation.● Repaint any paint scratches caused during equipment transportation or

installation in a timely manner. Equipment with scratches cannot be exposedto an outdoor environment for a long period of time.

● Before operations, ensure that the equipment is firmly secured to the floor orother solid objects, such as a wall or an installation rack.

● Do not use water to clean electrical components inside or outside of acabinet.

● Do not change the structure or installation sequence of equipment withoutpermission.

● Do not touch a running fan with your fingers, components, screws, tools, orboards before the fan is powered off or stops running.



Personal Safety● If there is a probability of personal injury or equipment damage during

operations on the equipment, immediately stop the operations, report thecase to the supervisor, and take feasible protective measures.

● To avoid electric shock, do not connect safety extra-low voltage (SELV) circuitsto telecommunication network voltage (TNV) circuits.

● Do not power on the equipment before it is installed or confirmed byprofessionals.

1.2 Personnel Requirements● Personnel who plan to install or maintain Huawei equipment must receive

thorough training, understand all necessary safety precautions, and be able tocorrectly perform all operations.

● Only qualified professionals or trained personnel are allowed to install,operate, and maintain the equipment.

● Only qualified professionals are allowed to remove safety facilities and inspectthe equipment.

● Personnel who will operate the equipment, including operators, trainedpersonnel, and professionals, should possess the local national requiredqualifications in special operations such as high-voltage operations, workingat heights, and operations of special equipment.

● Professionals: personnel who are trained or experienced in equipmentoperations and are clear of the sources and degree of various potentialhazards in equipment installation, operation, maintenance

● Trained personnel: personnel who are technically trained, have requiredexperience, are aware of possible hazards on themselves in certain operations,and are able to take protective measures to minimize the hazards onthemselves and other people

● Operators: operation personnel who may come in contact with theequipment, except trained personnel and professionals

● Only professionals or authorized personnel are allowed to replace theequipment or components (including software).

1.3 Electrical Safety

Grounding● For the equipment that needs to be grounded, install the ground cable first

when installing the equipment and remove the ground cable last whenremoving the equipment.

● Do not damage the ground conductor.● Do not operate the equipment in the absence of a properly installed ground

conductor.● Ensure that the equipment is connected permanently to the protective

ground. Before operating the equipment, check its electrical connection toensure that it is securely grounded.



General RequirementsUse dedicated insulated tools when performing high-voltage operations.

AC and DC Power

D ANGER

Do not connect or disconnect power cables with power on. Transient contactbetween the core of the power cable and the conductor will generate electric arcsor sparks, which may cause fire or personal injury.

● If a "high electricity leakage" tag is attached on the equipment, ground theprotective ground terminal on the equipment enclosure before connecting theAC power supply; otherwise, electric shock as a result of electricity leakagemay occur.

● Before installing or removing a power cable, turn off the power switch.● Before connecting a power cable, check that the label on the power cable is

correct.● If the equipment has multiple inputs, disconnect all the inputs before

operating the equipment.● A circuit breaker equipped with a residual current device (RCD) is not

recommended.● A damaged power cable must be replaced by the manufacturer, service agent,

or professionals to avoid risks.● High voltage operations and installation of AC-powered facilities must be

performed by qualified personnel.

Cabling● When routing cables, ensure that a distance of at least 30 mm exists between

the cables and heat-generating components or areas. This prevents damageto the insulation layer of the cables.

● Do not route cables behind the air intake and exhaust vents of theequipment.

● Ensure that cables meet the VW-1 or ZB flame spread rating requirements orhigher.

● Bind cables of the same type together. When routing cables of different types,ensure that they are at least 30 mm away from each other.

● If an AC input power cable is connected to the cabinet from the top, bend thecable in a U shape outside the cabinet and then route it into the cabinet.

● When the temperature is low, violent impact or vibration may damage theplastic cable sheathing. To ensure safety, comply with the followingrequirements:– Cables can be laid or installed only when the temperature is higher than

0°C. Handle cables with caution, especially at a low temperature.– Cables stored at subzero temperatures must be stored at room

temperature for at least 24 hours before they are laid out.



● Do not perform any improper operations, for example, dropping cablesdirectly from a vehicle.

● When selecting, connecting, and routing cables, follow local safety regulationsand rules.

ESD

NO TICE

The static electricity generated by human bodies may damage the electrostatic-sensitive components on boards, for example, the large-scale integrated (LSI)circuits.

● Wear ESD gloves or a well-grounded ESD wrist strap when touching thedevice or handling boards or application-specific integrated circuits (ASICs).

● When holding a board, hold its edge without touching any components. Donot touch the components with your bare hands.

● Package boards with ESD packaging materials before storing or transportingthem.

Figure 1-1 Wearing an ESD wrist strap

Neutral-Ground VoltageIt is recommended that the three-phase loads be equalized and the neutral-ground voltage be kept at less than 2 V to meet power distribution requirements.

1.4 Installation Environment Requirements● To prevent fire due to high temperature, ensure that the ventilation vents or

heat dissipation system are not blocked when the equipment is running.● Install the equipment in an area far away from liquids. Do not install it under

areas prone to condensation, such as under water pipes and air exhaust vents,or areas prone to water leakage, such as air conditioner vents, ventilation



vents, or feeder windows of the equipment room. Ensure that no liquid entersthe equipment to prevent faults or short circuits.

● If any liquid is detected inside the equipment, immediately disconnect thepower supply and contact the administrator.

● Do not expose the equipment to flammable or explosive gas or smoke. Donot perform any operation on the equipment in such environments.

● Ensure that the equipment room provides good heat insulation, and the wallsand floor are dampproof.

● Install a rat guard at the door of the equipment room.

Installation at Heights● Working at heights refers to operations that are performed at least 2 meters

above the ground.

● Do not work at heights if the steel pipes are wet or other potential dangerexists. After the preceding conditions no longer exist, the safety director andrelevant technical personnel need to check the involved equipment. Operatorscan begin working only after obtaining consent.

● When working at heights, comply with local relevant laws and regulations.

● Only trained and qualified personnel are allowed to work at heights.

● Before working at heights, check the climbing tools and safety gears such assafety helmets, safety belts, ladders, springboards, scaffolding, and liftingequipment. If they do not meet the requirements, take corrective measures ordisallow working at heights.

● Wear personal protective equipment such as the safety helmet and safety beltor waist rope and fasten it to a solid structure. Do not mount it on aninsecure moveable object or metal object with sharp edges. Make sure thatthe hooks will not slide off.

● Set a restricted area and eye-catching signs for working at heights to warnaway irrelevant personnel.

● Carry the operation machinery and tools properly to prevent them fromfalling off and causing injuries.

● Personnel involving working at heights are not allowed to throw objects fromthe height to the ground, or vice versa. Objects should be transported bytough slings, hanging baskets, highline trolleys, or cranes.

● Ensure that guard rails and warning signs are set at the edges and openingsof the area involving working at heights to prevent falls.

● Do not pile up scaffolding, springboards, or other sundries on the groundunder the area involving working at heights. Do not allow people to stay orpass under the area involving working at heights.

● Inspect the scaffolding, springboards, and workbenches used for working atheights in advance to ensure that their structures are solid and notoverloaded.

● Any violations must be promptly pointed out by the site manager or safetysupervisor and the involved personnel should be prompted for correction.Personnel who fail to stop violations will be forbidden from working.



1.5 Mechanical Safety

Hoisting Devices● Do not walk under hoisted objects.● Only trained and qualified personnel should perform hoisting operations.● Check that hoisting tools are available and in good condition.● Before hoisting objects, ensure that hoisting tools are firmly secured onto a

load-bearing object or wall.● Ensure that the angle formed by two hoisting cables is no more than 90

degrees, as shown in the following figure.

● Do not drag steel ropes and hoisting tools or bump hoisted objects againsthard objects during hoisting.

Using Ladders● Use wooden or fiberglass ladders when you need to perform live working at

heights.● When a step ladder is used, ensure that the pull ropes are secured and the

ladder is held firm.● Before using a ladder, check that it is intact and confirm its load bearing

capacity. Do not overload it.● Ensure that the ladder is securely positioned. The recommended angle for a

ladder against the floor is 75 degrees, as shown in the following figure. Anangle rule can be used to measure the angle. Ensure that the wider end of theladder is at the bottom, or protective measures have been taken at thebottom to prevent the ladder from sliding.



● When climbing a ladder, take the following precautions to reduce risks andensure safety:

– Keep your body steady.

– Do not climb higher than the fourth rung of the ladder from the top.

– Ensure that your body's center of gravity does not shift outside the legsof the ladder.

Drilling Holes

When drilling holes into a wall or floor, observe the following safety precautions:

NO TICE

Do not drill holes into the equipment. Doing so may affect the electromagneticshielding of the equipment and damage components or cables inside. Metalshavings from drilling may short-circuit boards inside the equipment.

● Obtain the consent from the customer and subcontractor before drilling.

● Wear goggles and protective gloves when drilling holes.

● When drilling holes, protect the equipment from shavings. After drilling, cleanup any shavings that have accumulated inside or outside the equipment.

Moving Heavy Objects

D ANGER

When removing a heavy or unstable component from a cabinet, be aware ofunstable or heavy objects on the cabinet.

● Be cautious to avoid injury when moving heavy objects.



● When moving the equipment by hand, wear protective gloves to preventinjuries.

● Move or lift the equipment by holding its handles or lower edges. Do not holdthe handles of modules (such as power supply units, fans, and boards) thatare installed in the equipment because they cannot support the weight of theequipment.

● Avoid scratching the cabinet surface or damaging cabinet components andcables during equipment transportation.

● When transporting the equipment using a forklift truck, ensure that the forksare properly positioned to ensure that the equipment does not topple. Beforemoving the equipment, secure it to the forklift truck using ropes. Whenmoving the equipment, assign dedicated personnel to take care of it.

● Choose railways, sea, or a road with good condition for transportation toensure equipment safety. Avoid tilt or jolt during transportation.

● Move a cabinet with caution. Any bumping or falling may damage theequipment.

1.6 Others● Exercise caution when shutting down the smart cooling product. Doing so

may cause equipment and room overheating, which will damage theequipment.

● Exercise caution when powering off the rPDU or PDU2000. Doing so mayaffect the power supply to equipment, which will interrupt services.

● Exercise caution when manually shutting down the UPS inverter fortransferring to bypass mode, or when adjusting the UPS output voltage levelor frequency. Doing so may affect the power supply to equipment.

● Exercise caution when setting battery parameters. Incorrect settings will affectthe power supply and battery lifespan.



2 Overview

2.1 PositioningThe ECC800-Pro is the core component for the smart module local management.It is intelligent, flexible in connection, easy to maintain, and reliable. It adopts thePOE bus for expansion, and allows all intelligent monitoring devices to be flexiblylaid out so that it can manage the devices in the smart module.

2.2 Features● Efficient

– Supports access of wireless devices and provides backup routes, reducingcable layout workload and enhancing reliability.

– Supports unlocking through the access card, password, fingerprint andfacial recognition.

– Supports remote alarm notifications by SMS and email.– Supports power supply and communication over the power over Ethernet

(POE) bus, providing rich bandwidth resources and high communicationefficiency.

– Supports remote upgrade, fault data export, and configuration parametersynchronization.

– Eight access control devices and four cameras can be connected to asingle smart module.

– Cascades a maximum of three ECC800-Pros. The active alarms and powerusage effectiveness (PUE) data of cascaded ECC800-Pros can be displayedon the WebUI of one ECC800-Pro.

– Collects statistics on the instantaneous PUE and average PUE of thesmart module and displays the statistics on a dashboard and in curves, sothat you can query the power consumption of the smart module in realtime.

– Supports the function of transparent transmission over the RS485 port, sothat southbound components can communicate with the NetEco afteraccessing the ECC800-Pro.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 2 Overview


– Allows you to modify device performance parameters and query historicalperformance data.

– Supports asset management, power management, and cooling capacitymanagement, allowing a grasp of dynamic information about the smartmodule in a timely manner, and facilitating effective management.

– Supports deployment wizard, which provides commissioning guidance.● Simple

– Supports local WiFi hotspots. You can connect to the ECC800-Pro usingthe app on the mobile phone or tablet computer to view the basicinformation about the smart module, such as layout, resources, energyefficiency, environment, and alarms. This increases usability.

– Supports query of device information in real time using the pad app ormobile phone app, facilitating operation and maintenance.

– Supports connection of NE monitoring devices to the POE bus in plug-and-play mode for auto-discovery and auto-registration requiring noconfiguration. This feature enables fast delivery and highermaintainability.

● Reliable– Supports intelligent linkage management which allows customization of

linkage logic, achieving intelligent operation and maintenance.– Supports dual power inputs, providing high reliability.– Supports intelligent battery monitoring management, which allows

monitoring of cell voltage and internal resistance for discovery of failedcells.

– Supports automation functions such as fire control linkage and smokealarm linkage.

– Supports a POE ring network, reducing networking fault points andproviding high reliability.

– Supports cabinet-level magnetic locks, door status sensor, andtemperature monitoring, providing high security.

– Interconnects with the NetEco and supports the SNMP, allowing centralmanagement over various scenarios and modules.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 2 Overview


3 Device Description

3.1 ECC800-Pro

3.1.1 Product ConfigurationThe ECC800-Pro data center controller is mainly used to monitor the devices andenvironment in a data center. It consists of the power module and main controlmodule, which are pluggable.

You can configure the ECC800-Pro collector in the following two manners:

Configuration 1 (typical configuration): one power module and one main controlmodule

Configuration 2: two power modules and one main control module.

NO TE

● In configuration 1, install a filler panel in slot 2.● In configuration 2, install power modules in slots 1 and 2.

Figure 3-1 ECC800-Pro collector in configuration 2

(1) Slot 1: power modules (2) Slot 2: power modules (3) Slot 3: main controlmodule

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 3 Device Description


Table 3-1 ECC800-Pro environmental specifications

Item Specifications

Operatingtemperature

–20°C to +50°C

Storage temperature –40°C to +70°C

Relative humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

Altitude 0–4000 m (When the altitude is between 3000 m and4000 m, the temperature decreases by 1°C for eachadditional 200 m.)

Table 3-2 ECC800-Pro structural specifications

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 442 mm x 330 mm x 43.6 mm

Weight 7.5 kg (dual power supplies + maincontrol module)

Color Black

Installation requirements Can be installed in a 1 U space in astandard 19-inch cabinet

Environmental protection RoHS5, REACH, WEEE

Figure 3-2 ECC800-Pro (rear view)

(1) 53.5V DC_OUT1 (2) 53.5V DC_OUT2 (3) AC_INPUT1

(4) AC_INPUT2

Power Port

The ECC800-Pro provides four power ports, including two AC input ports(AC_INPUT1 and AC_INPUT2) and two DC output ports (DC_OUT1 andDC_OUT2). Table 3-3 provides the power port pin definitions.



Table 3-3 Power port pin definitions

Port Type Pinsequence

Description

AC Pin1 L

Pin2 PE

Pin3 N

DC Pin1 48V+

Pin2 48VGND

3.1.2 Main Control Module

Figure 3-3 ECC800-Pro collector main control module

(1) USB (2) Status indicator (3) AIDI_1 (4) AIDI_2

(5) COM1/AIDI_4 (6) COM3/12V (7) WAN1 (8) LAN1/POE

(9) LAN2/POE (10) WAN2 (11) COM4/CAN (12) COM2/AIDI_5

(13) AIDI_3 (14) DO/12V (15) RF_Z (802.15.4) (16) WLAN (reserved)

(17) 4G (18) SW button

NO TE

The WLAN port is reserved and cannot be connected to a WLAN antenna for WLANcommunication.



Figure 3-4 ECC800-Pro main control module (side view)

(1) SIM card slot (2) Micro SD card slot (reserved)

Specifications

Table 3-4 Technical specifications of the ECC800-Pro main control module

Item Specifications

Power input ● Supports one AC input or two AC inputs● Rated voltage: 200–240 V AC● Rated frequency: 50/60 Hz

Maximumpowerconsumptionof the maincontrolmodule

70W

Power output ● Output voltage: 42–58 V DC (rated voltage: 53.5 V DC)● Output power of two power module supplies: 2000 W (200–

240 V AC); 940 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)● Output power of a single power module supply: 1000 W

(200–240 V AC); 470 W (linear derating at 85–175 V AC)

WAN port ● Supports two WAN ports. WAN1 is used to connect to themanagement system, and WAN2 is used for maintenance.The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000 Mbit/scommunication rates.

● Connect shielded network cables to the WAN ports.

LAN port ● Supports two LAN ports, which can be connected to theLAN. The ports support autonegotiation of 10/100/1000Mbit/s communication rates.

● Connect shielded network cables to the LAN ports.



Item Specifications

RS485 serialportexpansion

● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)● Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of

9600 bit/s● COM1–COM3 ports provide 12 V DC power.● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by

default.

PoE expansion Supports two PoE (GE) ports for expansion of the PoE bus, andsupports network isolation and ring network.

AIDIexpansion(RJ45)

● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)● Provides five universal AIDI ports for connecting to sensors

such as smoke sensors, water sensors, and NTC sensors.AIDI_1 to AIDI_3 are full-function AIDI ports, and AIDI_4 toAIDI_5 are simplified AIDI ports without type identification.

● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on bydefault.

DO expansion(RJ45)

● Output voltage: 13–15 V DC (rated voltage: 14.5 V DC)● Supports one active DO port.● The power supply can be switched on or off and is on by

default.

Fault isolation There are three groups of 12 V ports. A group has a maximumcurrent of 660 mA, a route has a maximum current of 800 mA,and the maximum total current is 2 A.Group 1: AIDI_1 and DO/12V portsGroup 2: AIDI_2, COM1/AIDI_4, and COM3/12V portsGroup 3: AIDI_3 and COM2/AIDI_5 ports

Wirelesscommunication

Supports wireless communication that complies withIEEE802.15.4.



Item Specifications

4G Supports the 4G module, SMS sending, and 3G communication,and provides a standard SIM card slot.1. China: 2G and 4G networks support China Unicom or China

Mobile SIM cards, and 3G networks support only ChinaUnicom SIM cards.

2. Outside China: Select SIM cards according to the followingwireless modes and frequency bands:● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5, B7, B8

and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bands B38, B40,and B41

● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, and B8● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800 MHz

NOTE● The prerequisite for using a SIM card is that the site has signal

coverage.● Due to the performance limitation of the wireless module, China

Telecom SIM cards are not supported.

USB ● Supports USB 2.0 and 5 V, 1 A power supply.● After installing the WiFi module, connect the WiFi module

to the ECC800-Pro using the app on the mobile phone orpad to view the basic information about the smart module,such as layout, resources, energy efficiency, environment,and alarms.

● You can insert a USB flash drive to export historical dataand configuration files and import configuration files.

SW button ● Restores the default IP address, factory settings, and userinformation.

● Supports RF_Z (802.15.4) networking.

Table 3-5 ECC800-Pro RF_Z parameters

Item Specifications

RF_Z operatingfrequency

2405–2480 MHz

RF_Z EIRP (max.) 8 dBm



Table 3-6 ECC800-Pro 4G parameters

Item Specifications

Operating frequency ● 4G: LTE-FDD, covering frequency bands B1, B3, B5,B7, B8 and B20; LTE-TDD, covering frequency bandsB38, B40, and B41

● 3G: WCDMA, covering frequency bands B1, B5, andB8

● 2G: GSM, covering frequency bands 900 MHz/1800MHz

EIRP (max.) 23 dBm

Communications Port

The ECC800-Pro provides the following communications ports. Figure 3-5 showsthe pins of the RJ45 port.

Figure 3-5 RJ45 port pins

There are four GE ports, that is, two WAN ports (WAN1 and WAN2) and two LANports (LAN1/POE and LAN2/POE).

Table 3-7 GE port pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 GE1+

Pin2 GE1-

Pin3 GE2+

Pin4 GE3+

Pin5 GE3-

Pin6 GE2-

Pin7 GE4+

Pin8 GE4-



Item Description

Indicator Greenindicator

Linked, steady on

Yellowindicator

ACT data communication, blinking

Table 3-8 COM1/AIDI_4, COM2/AIDI_5 port pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 RS485+

Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 DI-

Pin7 DI+

Pin8 GND


Power output indicator● Steady on: The 12 V DC output is normal.● Off: No 12 V DC output is provided.

Table 3-9 COM3/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 RS485+

Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 -

Pin8 GND



Item Description



Table 3-10 COM4/CAN port pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 RS485+

Pin2 RS485-

Pin3 -

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 RS485-

Pin6 -

Pin7 CAN_H

Pin8 CAN_L

The following provides the AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions.

NO TE

● Pins 1, 2, 4, and 5 identify sensor types.

● Pin 3 and Pin 8 are power output ports.

● Pin 6 and Pin 7 collect sensor data. Pin 7 can detect current type sensors (4–20 mA). Pin6 and Pin 7 can detect the output status of passive dry contact type sensors. Pin 3 andPin 7 can detect temperature sensors.

Table 3-11 AIDI_1, AIDI_2 and AIDI_3 ports pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 Type_1

Pin2 Type_2

Pin3 12V DC

Pin4 Type_3

Pin5 Type_4

Pin6 DI-

Pin7 DI+



Item Description

Pin8 GND



Table 3-12 DO/12V port pin definitions

Item Description

Pinsequence

Pin1 -

Pin2 -

Pin3 12V DC_OUT

Pin4 -

Pin5 -

Pin6 DO_OUT+

Pin7 DO_OUT-

Pin8 GND



Table 3-13 USB port pin definitions

Item Description

Pin sequence Pin1 5V

Pin2 DM

Pin3 DP

Pin4 GND



Indicators

Table 3-14 Indicators on the ECC800-Pro main control module

Indicator Color Name Status Description

RUN Green Running statusindicator

Steady on The power supply is normal,the program is being loaded.

Off The power supply isabnormal.

Blinking atlongintervals

The software runs properly(the indicator blinks at 0.5Hz, on for 1s and then offfor 1s) or the ECC800-Proregisters with the NetEcosuccessfully.

Blinking atshortintervals

The ECC800-Pro does notregister with the NetEco(the indicator blinks at 5 Hz,on for 0.125s and then offfor 0.125s).

ALM Red Alarm indicator Steady on A system failure alarm isgenerated.

Off The system is normal.

RF_Z Green Communicationstatus indicator


A network is set up, and nonode access is allowed (theindicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, onfor 1s and then off for 1s).

Blinking atsupershortintervals

A network is set up, andnode access is allowed (theindicator blinks at 10 Hz, onfor 0.05s and then off for0.05s).

SW Button

Table 3-15 SW button description

FunctionDescription

Operation Description Indicator Status

Wirelessnetwork RF_Z(802.15.4)pairing

In non-wireless network (802.15.4)pairing mode, press and hold thebutton for 3s to 5s to enter thewireless network pairing mode.

The RF_Z indicator isblinking at supershort intervals.



FunctionDescription

Operation Description Indicator Status

In wireless network (802.15.4)pairing mode, press and hold thebutton for 3s to 5s to exit thepairing mode; or the systemautomatically exits the pairing modeafter 30 minutes without pressingthe button.

The RF_Z indicator isblinking at longintervals.

Press and hold the button for morethan 8s to erase networkparameters. The systemautomatically enters the wirelessnetwork pairing mode.

The RF_Z indicator isblinking at supershort intervals.

WLAN enabling Press the button for less than 3s toenable WLAN.

None

Restoring thedefault IPaddress, factorysettings, anduser information

Press and hold down the button for1 minute.

None

3.1.3 Power Module

Indicator

Table 3-16 PSU indicator description


Green Powerindicator

Steady on The converter has a powerinput.

Off The converter has no powerinput or is faulty.


The converter is being queried(the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz,on for 1s and then off for 1s).


The converter applicationprogram is being loaded (theindicator blinks at 4 Hz, on for0.125s and then off for 0.125s).




Yellow Alarmindicator

Steady on The converter generates aforewarning indicating thatpower will be limited due toambient overtemperature, orgenerates a protectionshutdown alarm due toambient overtemperature orundertemperature.

Power input overvoltage orundervoltage protection

Reverse DC input connection

Slight current imbalance

Output overvoltage

Hibernation

Off The converter generates noprotection alarms.


The communication betweenthe converter and the outside isinterrupted (the indicator blinksat 0.5 Hz, on for 1s and thenoff for 1s).

Red Faultindicator

Steady on The converter locks out due tooutput overvoltage.

The converter delivers nooutput due to internal faults.

Off The converter is workingproperly.

3.2 Southbound Device Introduction

3.2.1 Rack Environment UnitThe rack environment unit collects and controls the environmental data of ITcabinets in the smart module.



Figure 3-6 Rack environment unit

(1) Ground port (2) 48 V DC powerinput port

(3) PoE port (4) COM1/12V port

(5) COM2/12V port (6) COM3 port (7) COM4 port (8) NTC1–3

(9) NTC4–6 (10) AI/DI_1 port (11) AI/DI_2 port (12) 12V_1 port

(13) 12V_2 port (14) BLINK button (15) Status indicator

Specifications

Table 3-17 Technical specifications for the rack environment unit

Item Specifications

Power input ● DC input: terminal, with an input voltage of 36 V DC–60 V DC● PoE input: one PoE port that complies with IEEE 802.3at.

12 V poweroutput

Two 12 V DC power outputs with the rated output current of 250mA

PoE port FE communication with a communications rate of 10/100 Mbit/s


● Four RS485 ports with the default communications rate of9600 bit/s

● Among the four RS485 ports, two support 12 V DC, 400 mApower output.

● The other two are isolated, with the default communicationsrate of 9600 bit/s, and do not support power output.

AI/DI input Two active 12 V DC, 200 mA AI/DI input ports

Temperature sensorport

Provides two RJ45 ports to connect to six temperature sensors,each RJ45 port connecting to three temperature sensors.

BLINKbutton

Provides a BLINK function.

Indicators

Table 3-18 lists the structural specifications for the rack environment unit.



Table 3-18 Indicator description

Indicator

Color

Name Status Description

PWR Green

Power inputstatusindicator

Steady on The power input is normal.

Off There is no power input.

RUN Green

Modulerunningstatusindicator

Off The power is abnormal or theboard program is loading.

Blinking atlong intervals

The software runs properly (theindicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, onfor 1s and then off for 1s).


PoE communication fails (theindicator blinks at 4 Hz, on for0.125s and then off for 0.125s).

Blinking The indicator blinks at supershort intervals for 0.5s (blinkingat 10 Hz, on for 0.05s and thenoff for 0.05s) and then turns offfor 0.5s. The cycle lasts for 10s.

ALM Red Alarmindicator

Steady on A system failure alarm isgenerated.

Off No system alarm is generated.

3.2.2 Smart ETH GatewayA smart ETH gateway allows the extension of the 53.5 V DC power supply and FEcommunication for the ECC800-Pro and can be flexibly deployed in a smartmodule.

Figure 3-7 Smart ETH gateway

(1) PWR_IN cascadingpower port

(2) FE_1 cascadingsignal port

(3) POE_1–2 ports (4) POE_3–4 ports



(5) 48V_OUT1 poweroutput port

(6) 48V_OUT2 poweroutput port

(7) FE_2 cascadingsignal port

(8) PWR_OUTcascading power port

(9) BLINK button (10) Status indicator

Specifications

Table 3-19 Technical specifications for a smart ETH gateway

Item Specifications

Power input PWR_IN D-type power input terminal, for power cascading, inputvoltage range: 45–55 V DCPower of a single smart ETH gateway: max (2.7 A, 48 V DC);power of cascaded smart ETH gateways: max (25 A, 48 V DC)

Poweroutput

● PWR_OUT D-type power output terminal, for powercascading, output voltage range: 45–55 V DC

● 48V_OUT1 and 48V_OUT2, terminal (1 A, 48 V DC), outputvoltage range: 45–55 V DC

FE port Two FE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100Mcommunication rate, for the cascading between smart ETHgateways and the communication with the upper computer

PoE port Four PoE ports, RJ45 terminal with an indicator, 10/100Mcommunications rate, complying with IEEE802.3, IEEE802.3u,IEEE802.3af/at

BLINKbutton

If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinksintermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super shortintervals for 0.5s and then off for 0.5s) for 5 seconds.

Indicators

Table 3-20 Indicators on a smart ETH gateway


PWR Green Powerinput statusindicator



RUN Green Modulerunningstatusindicator






The smart ETH gatewaysuccessfully registers withthe ECC800-Pro and thesoftware runs properly(the indicator blinks at 0.5Hz, on for 1s and then offfor 1s).

Blinking The indicator blinks atsuper short intervals for0.5s (blinking at 10 Hz, onfor 0.05s and then off for0.05s) and then turns offfor 0.5s. The cycle lasts for5s.


Steady on The PoE output current isoverloaded.

Off The PoE output is normalor not connected.

3.2.3 Access Control SystemThe access control system applies to the equipment rooms, aisle containment, andcabinet doors.

3.2.3.1 Aisle Access Control System

The access control system collects and monitors data about the access of devicesand personnel to ensure access security.

Diverse access control devices such as the fingerprint and card reader with akeypad, fingerprint and card reader, and card reader with a keypad are supported.Note that the communication distance between an access control device and anaccess actuator should be less than or equal to 5 meters.

NO TE

If the IC cards used by the access control device need to be purchased, the IC card chipspecifications are as follows.

Table 3-21 IC card chip specifications

Item Specifications

Chip model S50

Chip name Mifare 1K (S50) card

Chip type Philips Mifare 1 IC S50



Item Specifications

Operating frequency 13.56 MHz

Read/write distance 1–3 cm

Storage capacity 8 kbit, 16 partitions

The emergency button or emergency door release button is used to open a door inemergencies.

● The emergency button can disconnect the power supply to the lock andtherefore unlock the door in case of emergency.

● In case of emergency, break the glass of the emergency door release buttonto disconnect the power supply to the lock and therefore unlock the door.

3.2.3.1.1 Access Actuator

The access actuator is the control component for the aisle door in a smart module.It connects to the ECC800-Pro controller over FE port, wireless networking(802.15.4). It opens the magnetic lock by detecting the card swiping informationof the card reader, door open button information, and fire linkage information. Ithas access right management, access event record, and alarm record functions.

Figure 3-8 Access actuator

(1) 48 V power port (2) PoE port (3) RS485 port COM2

(4) RS485 port COM1 (5) Address DIP switch (6) Status indicator



(7) BLINK button (8) WG_2 Wiegand interface (9) WG_1 Wiegand interface

(10) AI/DI_2 dry contact(reserved port for linkagecontrol or third-party fireextinguishing system drycontacts)

(11) AI/DI_1 dry contact(reserved port for exitbutton)

(12) LOCK/GND/GATE/COM doorstatus or magnetic lock port

Specifications

Table 3-22 Access actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input ● DC input: terminal, with an input voltage of 36 V DC–60 VDC

● PoE power supply: one PoE port that complies withIEEE802.3at

PoE port FE communication with the rate of 10/100 Mbit/s


One wireless communication port that complies with IEEE802.15.4, mutual backup with FE communication

AI/DI port Two AI/DI ports, can connect to the fire alarm and exit button

DO/DI port ● One 12 V DC power output that controls magnetic locks,terminal

● One DI input port for connecting to the door status switch


Two RS485 ports (one route) with the default communicationrate of 9600 bit/s, physical port cascading supported (reservedfunction)

Wiegand port Two Wiegand ports, 12 V DC card reader operating poweroutput; two routes of card readers can operate at the sametime.

BLINK button ● Press the button for less than 1 second to start blinking.● Hold down the button for 1–5 seconds to search for a

network and start networking.● Hold down the button for more than 10 seconds to clear

network parameters.

Address DIPswitch

4-pin address DIP switch

E-label Supported



Indicators

Table 3-23 Access actuator indicators

Indicator Color Name Status

PWR Green Power inputstatusindicator

● Steady on: The power input is normal.● Off: There is no power input.

RUN Green Communication statusindicator

● Off: The power is abnormal or theboard program is loading.

● Blinking at long intervals: The accessactuator successfully registers with theECC800-Pro and the software runsproperly (the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz,on for 1s and then off for 1s).

● Blinking at short intervals: Thecommunication fails or the accessactuator fails to register with theECC800-Pro (the indicator blinks at 4Hz, on for 0.125s and then off for0.125s).

● Blinking: The indicator blinks at supershort intervals for 0.5s (blinking at 10Hz, on for 0.05s and then off for 0.05s)and then turns off for 0.5s. The cyclelasts for 5s.


● Steady on: A system failure alarm isgenerated.

● Off: No system alarm is generated.

RF_Z Green Wirelesscommunication statusindicator

● Steady on: No network parametersexist, or a network is to be created.

● Blinking at long intervals: A network isset up, and no node access is allowed(the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, on for1s and then off for 1s).

● Blinking intermittently at super shortintervals: The access actuator issearching for a network (the indicatorblinks at super short intervals for 0.5sand then turns off for 0.5s).

Communications PortsThe access actuator provides one DO port (LOCK/GND) and one DI port (GATE/COM). Table 3-24 lists the LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions.



Table 3-24 LOCK/GND/GATE/COM port pin definitions

Item Description

LOCK/GND(controlmagneticlocks) pinsequence

LOCK 12V_OUT

GND GND

GATE/COM(doorstatus) pinsequence

GATE DI1

COM COM

3.2.3.1.2 Fingerprint and Card Reader with a Keypad

Figure 3-9 Fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator

Table 3-25 Specifications for the fingerprint and card reader with a keypad

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W x H) 156 mm x 53 mm x 38 mm

Rated operating voltage 12 V DC±15%

Rated operating current 300 mA±15%

Card type supported IC card

Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with amaximum of 6000 fingerprints

Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports



Table 3-26 Access control device operating status

Item New Version

Standby LED indicator The indicator is steadyblue.

Fingerprint reader The indicator is off.

Unauthorized fingerprintcollection

LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, blue, red, and bluein order.

Fingerprint reader The indicator turns on(white).

Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds three.

Authorized fingerprintcollection

LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, and blue in order.


Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds once.

Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, and blue in order.


3.2.3.1.3 Fingerprint and Card Reader

Figure 3-10 Fingerprint and card reader

(1) Fingerprint reader (2) LED indicator



Table 3-27 Specifications of a fingerprint and card reader

Item Specifications


Rated operating voltage 12 V DC±5%

Rated operating current 300 mA±5%

Card type supported IC card

Authorized storage A maximum of 3000 authorized users, with amaximum of 6000 fingerprints

Communications mode RS485 and Wiegand communications ports

Table 3-28 Access control device operating status

Item New Version

Standby LED indicator The indicator is steadyblue.

Fingerprint reader The indicator is off.

Unauthorized fingerprintcollection

LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, blue, red, and bluein order.


Buzzer sounds The buzzer sounds three.

Authorized fingerprintcollection

LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, and blue in order.



Card swiping LED indicator The indicator blinks blue,red, and blue in order.




3.2.3.1.4 Card Reader with a Keypad

Figure 3-11 Card reader with a keypad

Table 3-29 Technical specifications of a card reader with a keypad

Item Specifications


Operating voltage Operating voltage range: 10.8–13.2 V DC; ratedvoltage: 12 V DC

Operating current Static standby current: 80 mA; dynamic operatingcurrent (card swiping, key pressing): 150 mA;minimum input current: 12 V DC/300 mA

Communication mode Wiegand communications port

3.2.3.1.5 Magnetic Lock

Figure 3-12 Double-door magnetic lock



Figure 3-13 Single-door magnetic lock

Figure 3-14 Sliding-door magnetic lock

(1) Magnetic lock fastener (2) Magnetic lock

(3) Magnet (4) Magnet fastener

3.2.3.2 Cabinet Access Control SystemThe cabinet access control system applies to cabinets in the aisle containment toensure data and device security.

Cabinet Electronic LockFeatures:

● An IC card can be used after being authorized using software.● An IC card can be authorized for one lock or all locks.● Door opening information is recorded through a network.● The system displays the status of cabinet doors and locks in real time, the

system displays the status of cabinet doors and locks in real time and reportsthe unauthorized door opening.

● The system supports remote unlocking.



Figure 3-15 Cabinet electronic lock

Table 3-30 Cabinet electronic lock specifications

Item Specifications

Rated input voltage 12 V DC

Rated current 200–300 mA

Unlock mode Unlocking with a powered card

Card type supported IC card (operating frequency: 13.56MHz)

Mechanically unlock Supported

Mechanical Code LockFeatures:● The cabinet door can be opened with only the key and without the password.● The cabinet door can be opened with only the password and without the key.● The user can set a password.● A password should contain at least three digits.● The password can be reset if the user forgot it.



Figure 3-16 Mechanical code lock

3.2.3.3 Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock

The cabinet electronic clasp lock is used to manage access control. It can beautomatically unlocked, or manually locked and unlocked.

Figure 3-17 Cabinet electronic clasp lock

(1) LED indicator (2) DIP switch (3) RJ45 power port



Table 3-31 RJ45 port definitions

No. Pin Description Description

1 RS485+ RS485+

2 RS485- RS485-

3 +12 V power supply +12VDC

4 RS485+ RS485+

5 RS485- RS485-

6 - -

7 - -

8 Ground GND

Table 3-32 LED indicator status

Indicator

Color Name Operation

Status Description

RUN Green Modulerunningindicator

/ Blinking

● The door lock is pairedwith the host, and thepower supply is normal:The indicator blinks at0.5 Hz (on for 1s andthen off for 1s).

● The door lock fails topair with the host: Theindicator blinks at 4 Hz(on for 0.125s and thenoff for 0.125s).


PressSW.

Blinkingintermittently atsupershortintervals

● The indicator blinks atsuper short intervals for0.5s, and then off for0.5s.

● The indicator blinks atsuper short intervals(blinking at 10 Hz, on for0.05s and then off for0.05s). The cycle lasts for5s.


/ Steady on

A system failure alarm isgenerated.



Indicator

Color Name Operation

Status Description

Off The system is normal.

3.2.4 AC ActuatorThe AC actuator is used in a smart module to control the lighting inside the smartmodule by receiving commands from the access control system or host, infraredlinkage information (disabled by default), or signals from the light button. It alsoprovides a charging port for the PAD (AC OUT2).

Figure 3-18 AC actuator

(1) AC OUT2 port (2) AC OUT1 port (3) AC IN port (4) Status indicator

(5) BLINK button (6) AIDI_1 and AIDI_2 (7) COM1 and COM2

Specifications

Table 3-33 AC actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input One AC input, 100 V AC to 240 V AC.



Item Specifications

Power output ● AC OUT1: two AC outputs, 100 V AC to 240 V AC,maximum total current: 5 A.

● AC OUT2: one AC output, 100 V AC to 240 V AC, maximumcurrent: 5 A.


One wireless communication port that complies withIEEE802.15.4

RS485 serialport

One route of dual RS485 ports, not isolated (reserved)

AI/DI detection Two AI/DI dry contacts, connecting to two light buttons

PAD intelligentcharging

Charging stops when the PAD battery level reaches 100%.When the battery level is lower than 40% (default value,which can be set to 30, 40, or 50), charging starts.



network parameters.

Indicators

Table 3-34 AC actuator indicators


Power Green Powerstatusindicator



RUN Green Runningstatusindicator

Off The power is abnormal or theboard program is loading.


The AC actuator successfullyregisters with the ECC800-Proand the software runs properly(the indicator blinks at 0.5 Hz,on for 1s and then off for 1s).


The communication fails orthe AC actuator fails toregister with the ECC800-Pro(the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,on for 0.125s and then off for0.125s).




Blinking The indicator blinks at supershort intervals for 0.5s(blinking at 10 Hz, on for0.05s and then off for 0.05s)and then turns off for 0.5s.The cycle lasts for 5s.



Off No system alarm is generated.

RF_Z Green Communicationstatusindicator

Steady on No network parameters exist,or a network is to be created.



Blinkingintermittently at supershortintervals

The AC actuator is searchingfor a network (the indicatorblinks at super short intervalsfor 0.5s and then turns off for0.5s).

3.2.5 Skylight ActuatorThe skylight actuator controls the rotating skylight on the aisle containment ofthe smart module through the alarm linkage information from the fireextinguishing system or the control information from the upper computer. Theskylight actuator supports E-labels and wireless networking (802.15.4).



Figure 3-19 Skylight actuator

(1) LOCK/GNDmagnetic lock DOoutput port

(2) BUTTON/GNDwindow open button DIinput port

(3) AI/DI_1 sensorinput port

(4) AI/DI_2 sensorinput port

(5) BLINK button (6) Status indicator (7) Address DIPswitch

(8) COM1 port

(9) COM2 port (10) PoE port (11) 48 V power port

Specifications

Table 3-35 Skylight actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications

Power input ● DC input: terminal, with an input voltage of 36 V DC–60 VDC

● PoE power supply: one PoE port that complies withIEEE802.3at

PoE port FE communication with the rate of 10/100 Mbit/s


One wireless port that complies with IEEE 802.15.4, mutualbackup with FE communication

AI/DI port Two AI/DI ports for detecting fire extinguishing linkage signals;smoke detection signals also supported

DO output One 12 V DC power output for controlling the skylightmagnetic lock; driving nine skylight magnetic lockssimultaneously

DI input One DI input port for connecting to the window open button



Item Specifications



network parameters.

Address DIPswitch

4-pin address DIP switch

E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-36 Skylight actuator indicators


Power Green Power inputstatusindicator



RUN Green Runningstatusindicator

Off The power is abnormal orthe board program isloading.


The skylight actuatorsuccessfully registers withthe ECC800-Pro and thesoftware runs properly (theindicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, onfor 1s and then off for 1s).


The communication fails orthe skylight actuator fails toregister with the ECC800-Pro(the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,on for 0.125s and then offfor 0.125s).







Off No system alarm isgenerated.

RF_Z Green Communication statusindicator

Steady on No network parametersexist, or a network is to becreated.




The skylight actuator issearching for a network (theindicator blinks at supershort intervals for 0.5s andthen turns off for 0.5s).

Communications PortsThe skylight actuator provides one DO port (LOCK/GND) and one DI port(BUTTON/GND). Table 3-37 lists the LOCK/GND/BUTTON/GND port pindefinitions.

Table 3-37 LOCK/GND/BUTTON/GND port pin definitions

Item Description

LOCK/GNDpinsequence

LOCK 12V_OUT

GND GND

BUTTON/GND pinsequence

BUTTON DI3

GND GND

3.2.6 Multi-Functional SensorA multi-functional sensor integrates the temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor,smoke sensor and infrared detection. The multi-functional sensor can connect tothe ECC800-Pro over FE or wireless communication.

NO TE

The infrared detection function is enabled only when the intelligent lighting function isenabled.



Figure 3-20 Multi-functional sensor

(1) Address DIP switch (2) BLINK button (3) TEST button

(4) RF_Z indicator (5) RUN indicator (6) ALM indicator

Specifications

Table 3-38 Multi-functional sensor technical specifications

Item Specifications

Temperaturemonitoring

–40°C to +70°C. Precision ≤ ±0.5°C (25°C).

Humiditymonitoring

0 to 100% RH. Precision ≤ ±5% RH (25°C, 20%–80% RH).

Smokemonitoring

Complies with Ul217. The smoke sensor generates an alarmwhen testing 3.2% weak dust for each foot.

PoE port One PoE port that complies with IEEE802.3 at

RS485 port Reserves one RS485 port.

DI input One DI input port, 12 V DC power input

BLINK button Wireless communication:● If the sensor is not connected to the network, after you hold

down the button for 2s to 3s, the sensor connects to thenetwork in RF_Z mode.

● If the sensor is connected to network, after you hold downthe button for 2s to 3s, the RUN indicator blinks.

● Hold down the button for more than 6 seconds to clearnetwork parameters.



Item Specifications

Test button(smoke sensortest button)

Supports the smoke sensor test.Hold down the button for 3s to trigger a smoke alarm, andrelease the button to stop the smoke alarm.

E-label Supported

Indicators

Table 3-39 Description of the indicators on the multi-functional sensor


RUN Green Modulerunningstatusindicator


The multi-functional sensorsuccessfully registers withthe ECC800-Pro and thesoftware runs properly (theindicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, onfor 1s and then off for 1s).


The multi-functional sensorfails to register with theECC800-Pro or thecommunication fails (theindicator blinks at 4 Hz, onfor 0.125s and then off for0.125s).





RF_Z Green Communication statusindicator

Steady on No network parametersexist, or a network is to becreated.







The multi-functional sensoris searching for a network(the indicator blinks at supershort intervals for 0.5s andthen turns off for 0.5s).

3.2.7 Smoke SensorSmoke sensors are used to detect the smoke concentration.

Figure 3-21 Smoke sensor

Table 3-40 Technical specifications of a smoke sensor

Item Specifications

Operating voltage DC12 V (9–16 V DC)

Quiescent current < 8 mA

Alarm current < 35 mA

Output mode Relay output

Output contact capacity 3 A/120 V AC or 3 A/24 V AC

Operating temperature –10ºC to +50ºC

Ambient humidity < 95% RH (non-condensing)

Dimensions Diameter: 112 mm, height: 41 mm

3.2.8 Temperature SensorThe temperature sensor (BOM number: 33010348) is used for the surfacetemperature measure, industrial process control, measurement instrument, etc.



Figure 3-22 Temperature sensor

Table 3-41 Temperature sensor specifications

Item Specifications

Measurement range –20°C to +70°C

Measurement precision ±1°C (25°C)

Operating temperature –10°C to +55°C

Operating voltage 10–16 V DC


3.2.9 Cabinet Temperature Sensor

Figure 3-23 Cabinet temperature sensor

Table 3-42 Technical specifications of the cabinet temperature sensor

Item Specifications

Temperature detectionrange

–20°C to +70°C



Item Specifications

Temperature detectiontolerance

● ±1°C (≥ –10°C, < 25°C) & (> 25°C, ≤ 55°C)● ±2°C (≥ –20°C, < –10°C) & (> +55°C, ≤ +70°C)● ±0.5°C (25°C)


Operating humidity 5%–95% RH


Storage humidity ≤ 95% RH, non-condensing

3.2.10 Alarm BeaconWhen a fire occurs or smokes are generated in the micro-modular equipmentroom, the alarm beacon generates an audible signal and flashes to informoperators of fire and security risks.

Figure 3-24 Alarm beacon

Table 3-43 Structural specifications of an alarm beacon

Item Specifications

Dimensions (L x W xH)

130 mm x 75 mm x 55 mm

Installationrequirements

Installed on a wall

Environmentalprotection

RoHS, Reach



Table 3-44 Technical specifications of an alarm beacon

Item Specifications

Power input RJ45 port, input voltage 9–16 V DC, operating current ≤400 mA

Sound pressure ≥ 100±3 dB/30 cm

Continuous operatingtime

≥ 45 min

3.2.11 (Optional) Smart U Space ManagerThe smart U space manager is designed for IT asset management of the datacenter. The system automatically detects the physical location of IT devices in thedata center, collects IT asset codes and the information about U space usage.

Figure 3-25 Smart U space manager

(1) Asset detection strip (2) Asset label (3) Main control box

Table 3-45 Technical specifications of the smart U space manager

Item Specifications

Characteristic Applicable to 42 U cabinets

Communications port RS485, Modbus-RTU

Communication Rate: 9600 bit/sCommunication format: one start bit, eight databits, no parity bit, one stop bit

Power input 12 V DC±5% (RJ45)

Rated current and powerconsumption

250 mA

Data upload port One RS485 route (two RJ45 ports)



Item Specifications

Dimensions (mm) Main control box: 71 mm x 70 mm x 25 mmDetection strip: 1867 mm x 18 mm x 6.5 mm (Hx W x D)

Weight ≤ 0.2 kg (main control box), ≤ 0.35 kg (assetdetection strip)

Installation mode Magnet-based installation

3.2.12 eLight Actuator

The eLight actuator has the function of associating alarms, access authorizationstatus, and atmospheres.

Table 3-46 eLight functions

Light of theeLight StripLight

eLight Strip LightLightingSpecifications

Cause

Red light Steady on The smart module raises a criticalalarm.

Blinking for 3seconds

Access authorization fails and theaisle door cannot be opened.

Blinking The eLight fails to communicate withthe ECC800-Pro.

Orange light Steady on The smart module raises a majoralarm.

Yellow light Steady on The smart module raises a minoralarm.

Gray light Steady on The smart module raises a warning.

Green light Blinking for 3seconds

Access authorization succeeds andthe door can be opened.

Blue light Steady on Associated alarm severity is set toNone.

Other color light Steady on orblinking

The device is abnormal or cables areincorrectly connected to terminals R,G, and B.



Figure 3-26 eLight actuator

Table 3-47 eLight actuator technical specifications

Item Specifications


112 mm x 76 mm x 35 mm

Power input DC input: terminal, with the input voltage of 24 V DC

Power output AC output: terminal, with the output voltage of 120 VAC

RS485 port (RJ45) Two RS485 ports, support cascading

Installation Install on a guide rail


4°C–40°C

Ambient humidity 5%–95% RH (non-condensing)

3.2.13 Water SensorA water sensor detects water on the floor in real time and generates an alarmwhen water is detected.

3.2.13.1 WLDS600 Water SensorThe WLDS600 water sensor consists of a water detection cable, a water detectorwith the BOM number of 33010556, an extension line, and a conversion cable.



Figure 3-27 WLDS600 water sensor

(1) Tie line (2) Water leakage locationcable

(3) Terminal

(4) Extension line (5) Water leakage locator

Table 3-48 Technical specifications of the WLDS600 water sensor

Item Specifications

Dimensions (Lx W x H)

70 mm x 58 mm x 86 mm

Power supply 9–16 V DC or 9–16 V AC

Impulsecurrent

≤ 450 mA

Powerdissipation

< 2 W

Power,communication connector

RJ45 female connector 1 piece

Protocol type Modbus-RTU, data bits 8 bits, no parity

Baud rate,address

Default support 9600, baud rate configurable, addressconfigurable, default address is 1, stop bit is 1 bit.

Detecteddistant

100 m (support cable connection in series)



Item Specifications

Accuracy ±0.5 m (the cable length 0-10 m)1 m±1% (the cable length 10-100 m)

Indicatorstatus

When the power supply is working properly, the green indicatoris on. When a fault occurs, the yellow indicator is on. Whenwater leakage occurs, the red indicator is on.

Display 4-bits Nixie tube shows leaking position.

AdjustableSensitivity

3 grade of sensitivity

Installationmode

DIN track install supported.

3.2.13.2 WLDS900 Water SensorThe WLDS900 water sensor with the BOM number of 33010352 consists of awater detection cable, a water detector, and a conversion cable.

Figure 3-28 WLDS900 water sensor

(1) Water detector (2) Conversion cable end A, connected tothe water detector

(3) Conversion cable

(4) Conversion cableend B, connected to thewater detection cable

(5) Water detection cable end A,connected to the conversion cable

(6) Water detection cable



Table 3-49 WLDS900 water sensor specifications

Item Specification

Operatingvoltage

12 V DC (9–16 V DC)


–20°C to +70°C

Storagetemperature

–40°C to +85°C

Humidity 10%–80% RH (non-condensing)

3.2.13.3 Electrode Water SensorThe electrode water sensor with the BOM number of 33010444 contains electrodeprobes and cables.

Figure 3-29 Electrode water sensor

Table 3-50 Technical specifications of the electrode water sensor

Item Specification


–40°C to +80°C

Storagetemperature

–40°C to +80°C

Service life 10 years

3.2.14 WiFi ModuleThe WiFi module provides WiFi signals for equipment such as pads and mobilephones to interact with the host computer.



Figure 3-30 WiFi module

Table 3-51 Technical specifications

Item Specifications

Wirelessstandard

IEEE 802.11n, IEEE 802.11g, and IEEE 802.11b

Networkbandwidth

● 11n: up to 150 Mbps● 11g: up to 54 Mbps● 11b: up to 11 Mbps

Frequency band 2.4–2.4835 GHz

Wirelesstransmissionpower

20 dBm (MAX EIRP)

Supportedoperatingsystem

Windows 2000/XP/Vista/Linux/Win 7

Port USB 2.0 Hi-Speed connector

Voltage range 5.0 V DC±5%


–20°C to +70°C

Storagetemperature

–40°C to +90°C

Relativehumidity

10%–90% RH (non-condensing)

Storagehumidity

5%–90% RH (non-condensing)

Power < 0.8 W



3.2.15 ETH ConverterThe ETH converter is used to convert the Modbus–RTU protocol or CAN protocolto the Modbus-MAC protocol for connecting to the PoE bus.

Figure 3-31 ETH converter

(1) Status indicator (2) BLINK button (3) COM1 communicationsport

(4) COM2 communicationsport

(5) 48 V power port (6) PoE port

Specifications

Table 3-52 ETH converter technical specifications

Item Specifications

Powerinput

● DC input: terminal, with an input voltage of 36 V DC–60 V DC● PoE power supply: one PoE port, 10/100M communication rate,

complying with IEEE802.3at

RS485/CAN

Provides RS485/CAN ports. The default communications rate forthe RS485 port is 9600 bit/s, and that for the CAN port is 125kbit/s. Both ports match the RJ45 terminal shared by RS485 andCAN.

BLINKbutton

If you press the BLINK button, the RUN indicator blinksintermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super shortintervals for 0.5s and then off for 0.5s) for 10 seconds.

E-label Supported



Indicators

Table 3-53 ETH converter indicators


PWR Green Power inputstatusindicator



RUN Green Operatingstatusindicator



The ETH convertersuccessfully registers withthe ECC800-Pro and thesoftware runs properly (theindicator blinks at 0.5 Hz, onfor 1s and then off for 1s).


The communication fails orthe ETH converter fails toregister with the ECC800-Pro(the indicator blinks at 4 Hz,on for 0.125s and then offfor 0.125s).





3.2.16 PADThe pad allows the wireless access from the data center management system. Youcan monitor the equipment in the data center and environmental parameters inreal time over the app. The recommended model is T5-10.



Figure 3-32 PAD

Table 3-54 Pad structural specifications

Item Specifications


243 mm x 164 mm x 7.8 mm

Weight About 460 g

Table 3-55 Pad technical specifications

Item Specifications

Touchscreen 10.1-inch, 1920 x 1200 resolution, IPS screen, and multi-touch

Storage ● Machine: 32 GB● Memory: 3 GB● LPDDR3 extension card: Micro SD, a maximum of 256

GB (non-standard configuration)

Button/Port ● Touch button + power switch and volume button● 3.5 mm stereo headphones port● Micro SD card port● MicroUSB port



Item Specifications

Camera ● Rear camera: 8-megapixel, F2.4 aperture, automaticfocus

● Front camera: 2-megapixel, F2.4 aperture, fixed focus● Sensor type: BSI● Flash: not supported● Video recording: rear camera up to 1080 pixels at 30

FPS; front camera up to 720 pixels at 30 FPS● Zoom mode: digital zoom● Photo resolution: rear camera up to 8 M (3264 x 2448

pixels); front camera up to 1.9 M (1600x1200 pixels)

Battery ● Materials: Li-polymer● Capacity: 5100 mAh (typical value) or 4980 mAh

(rated value)● WiFi connection/web page browse time: about 6.5

hours● Power adapter charge time: about 3.5 hours (5 V 2 A

adapter)

3.2.17 T/H Sensor

3.2.17.1 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010346)

Figure 3-33 Appearance

The T/H sensor uses an RJ45 connector.



Figure 3-34 Pins of an RJ45 connector

Table 3-56 RJ45 port pin definitions

Pin Description

Pin1 A

Pin2 B

Pin3 V+

Pin4/5/6/7 Reserved

Pin8 V-

Table 3-57 T/H sensor specifications

Item Specifications

Temperature measuring range –20°C to +70°C

Temperature accuracy ±1°C

Humidity measuring range 5%–95% RH

Humidity precision ±5% RH (25°C, 20%–80% RH)




Output RS485



3.2.17.2 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS)


(1) Status indicator (2) RS485_IN

(3) RS485_OUT (4) Address DIP switch

The RS485 communications ports of the T/H sensor use RJ11 (6P6C) connectors.



Pin Description

Pin1 or Pin 2 GND

Pin3 RS485–

Pin4 RS485+

Pin5 or Pin 6 12V


Item Specifications







Item Specifications




Output RS485

3.2.17.3 Ambient T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010516)


The T/H sensor uses an RJ45 connector.

NO TE

The appearance of the T/H sensor depends on the onsite delivery.



Pin Description

Pin1 or Pin 4 A

Pin2 or Pin 5 B

Pin3 V+

Pin6 V-

Pin7 Reserved




Item Specifications








Output RS485

3.2.17.4 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG)


(1) RS485-OUT (2) RS485-IN (3) DIP switch (4) Button

(5) NTC1–3 (6) NTC4–6 (7) Display


Item Specifications







Item Specifications




Output RS485

3.2.17.5 T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02312PBL)


(1) RS485-OUT (2) RS485-IN (3) DIP switch (4) Button

(5) NTC1–3 (6) NTC4–6 (7) Display


Item Specifications








Output RS485



3.2.18 Infrared Remote Control Module

Figure 3-41 Infrared remote control module

Table 3-64 Technical specifications of the infrared remote control module

Item Specifications

Number of supportedremote controlcommands

≤ 4

Communication Interworks with the monitoring system overModbus-RTU to implement remote control.The baud rate can be 9600 bit/s.

Infrared emissiondistance

≤ 10 m

Power supply 9–16 V DC

Power ≤ 350 mA


Operating humidity 5%–95% RH

IP rating IP20

Indicator Communication indicator and running indicator

Color Black

Address setting Supports Modbus address setting

3.2.19 Intelligent Battery Monitoring SystemThe intelligent battery monitoring system consists of the iBOX and iBAT (BIM).



The iBOX is an intelligent battery management module that collects wirelesscommunication data from the downstream iBAT groups, collects and analyzes theoperating data of battery strings, calculates state of charge (SOC) and state ofhealth (SOH) of batteries and battery strings and estimates the battery healthstatus accordingly, supports battery tripping management, and uploads data tothe management unit through COM or PoE ports.

The iBAT is a battery monitoring module that monitors the voltages, internalresistances, and pole temperatures of batteries.

In the scenario with battery cabinets, the iBOX is installed inside a smart modulebattery cabinet and the iBOX communications cable connects to a smart ETHgateway.

(Optional) When a battery system needs to be managed by multiple iBOXs, theiBOXs can be connected to northbound devices using straight-through cables (theECC800-Pro supports four iBOXs in parallel through the smart ETH gateway)without cascading.

Figure 3-42 Connecting the iBOX signal cable

3.2.19.1 iBOXiBOX is a battery information collection module. It collects battery status datafrom the downstream iBAT groups through wireless communication, and sendsthe data to the ECC, UPS, and the third-party network management system(NMS) through COM or PoE ports.



Appearance

Figure 3-43 iBOX front view

(1) –48 V 0.5 A port (powerinput)

(2) PoE port (3) COM_IN port (RS485communication input)

(4) COM_OUT port (RS485communication output)

(5) DI and DO ports (6) HALL_1–HALL_8 currentmonitoring ports

(7) RF_Z antenna port (8) BCB_1–BCB_4 ports(BCB_2–BCB_4 reserved)

(9) BCB_OUT and BCB_IN ports

(10) Networking switch (11) PWR indicator (12) RUN indicator

(13) ALM indicator (14) RF_Z indicator (15) Delivered antenna

Figure 3-44 iBOX bottom view

(1) Fastener (2) Micro SD card slot

(3) Default button (IP reset) (4) ADDR dual in-line package (DIP) switch(RS485 communications address)



(5) 12 V 2 A port (power input)

Power Port

Figure 3-45 Power port pins

Table 3-65 12 V 2 A port pin definitions

Pin Definition Description

1 – An external powermodule is adopted tosupply 12 V DCoperating voltage.

2 +

Table 3-66 –48 V, 0.5 A port pin definitions


1 + The system provides 48V DC operating voltagein this scenario.2 –

PoE Port

Figure 3-46 PoE port pins



Table 3-67 PoE port pin definitions


1 TX+ Supports power supplythrough the PoE port.The terminal is an RJ45terminal with anindicator.

2 TX–

3 RX+

4, 5 P45_P1

6 RX–

7, 8 P78_P1

COM Port

Figure 3-47 COM port pins

Table 3-68 COM port pin definitions

Pin Signal Description

1 RS485+ Two cascaded RS485communication ports

2 RS485–

3 NC

4 RS485+

5 RS485–

6 GND

7 NC

8 NC



DI and DO Ports

Table 3-69 DI and DO port pin definitions

Pin Definition

SignalDescription

Status Description InitialStatus

Description

1 + Drycontactinputsignal

● Open: The drycontact input isopen.

● Closed: The drycontact input isclosed.

Open Dry contactinput andoutputsignals

2 –

3 NO Drycontactoutputsignal

● Open: The drycontact output isopen.

● Closed: The drycontact output isclosed.

Open

4 COM

HALL Current Monitoring Port

Figure 3-48 HALL current monitoring port pins

Table 3-70 Pin definitions for HALL current monitoring ports


1 +12V Detect the charge anddischarge currents offour battery strings oreight battery routes.

2 –12V

3 AI

4 GND



NO TE

● If the battery string is configured with the neutral wire, measure the currents of the positiveand negative battery string cables. If the battery string is not configured with the neutralwire, measure the current of either the positive or negative battery string cable. Thefollowing uses the scenario where the battery string is configured with the neutral wire as anexample.

● When an iBOX manages multiple battery strings, first connect the Hall effect sensors on thepositive and negative cables of battery string 1 respectively to the corresponding ports onthe iBOX. Then connect the Hall effect sensors on battery string 2 to the iBOX in the sameway, and so on.

● If the positive or negative battery string cable is too thick to be routed through the Halleffect sensor, or the measurement range of the Hall effect sensor is not enough, use multipleHall effect sensors to monitor the current of one battery string. The iBOX supports the sumof the monitoring results of multiple Hall effect sensors, which is set through Multi-Hall cur.setting.

● The value of Multi-Hall cur. setting equals the number of positive or negative Hall effectsensors in a single battery string and should be greater than or equal to 1.

BCB Port

Figure 3-49 BCB port pins

Table 3-71 BCB_1–BCB_4 port pin definitions

Pin Definition

SignalDescription


Description

1 OL Monitorswhether theBCBconnects tothe signalinput port.

● Grounded: BCBconnected.

● Disconnected: BCBnot connected.

Disconnected

The fourBCBs canseparatelymanagetripping offourbatteryroutes.2 STA Monitors

the batterycircuitbreaker

● Grounded: Thebattery circuitbreaker is ON.

● Disconnected: Thebattery circuitbreaker is OFF.

Disconnected



Pin Definition

SignalDescription


Description

3 DRV Controlsbatterycircuitbreaker tripand outputs12 V drivingsignals

● 0 V: There is nodriving signal forBCB tripping.

● 12 V: There is adriving signal forBCB tripping.

0V

4 GND Secondaryside ground

Table 3-72 BCB_IN and BCB_OUT cascading port pin definitions

Pin Definition

BCB_INSignalDescription

BCB_OUTSignalDescription

StatusDescription

InitialStatus

Description

1 OL Specifieswhetherthe BCBconnectsto thesignaloutputport.

Specifieswhether thecascadedBCBsconnect tothe signalinput port.

● Grounded:BCBconnected.

● Disconnected: BCBnotconnected.

Disconnected

ReceivesBCBcommands sentby theUPS andsupportsBCB portcascadingmanagement.

2 STA Signaloutputport forthe batterycircuitbreakerstatus

Monitorswhether thecascadedBCBs areconnectedto the input.

● Grounded:Thebatterycircuitbreaker isON.

● Disconnected: Thebatterycircuitbreaker isOFF.

Disconnected



Pin Definition

BCB_INSignalDescription

BCB_OUTSignalDescription

StatusDescription

InitialStatus

Description

3 DRV Controlsbatterycircuitbreakertrip andreceives 12V drivingsignals

● 0 V:There isnodrivingsignal forBCBtripping.

● 12 V:There isa drivingsignal forBCBtripping.

0V -

4 GND Secondarysideground

DIP Switch

Table 3-73 DIP switch description

No. Definition Description

1 ADDR_1 RS485 communicationsaddress setting

2 ADDR_2

3 ADDR_3

4 ADDR_4

Indicators

Table 3-74 Indicators

Indicators

Color Meaning Status Description Measure

RF_Z Green Wirelesscommunicationstatus

Steady on No networkparametersexist. (Anetwork isto becreated.)

Requires nohandling.



Indicators


Blinking atsupershortintervals

A network isbeingcreated(new nodesallowed).


Data isbeingtransmitted(new nodesnotallowed).

RUN Green Northboundcommunicationstatus


Thecommunication isnormal.


Blinkingintermittently atsupershortintervals

Blinking,lasting for10s.



Communication fails.(Nolegitimatenorthbounddata hasbeenreceived for3 minutes.)

1. Check whetherthecommunicationcable is loose.● If yes,

reconnect thecommunicationcable.

● If no, go to thenext step.

2. Check whetherthe device ismalfunctioning.● If yes, replace

the device.● If no, contact

Huaweitechnicalsupport.



Indicators



Steady on The actualnumber ofonlinedevices isless thanthe value ofiBATnumber.

Check the value ofiBAT number, theiBAT cableconnection, and theiBAT indicators.

Off The actualnumber ofonlinedevicesequals thevalue ofiBATnumber.


PWR Green Powerindicator

Steady on Boardpowerindicator.


NO TE

● If an indicator blinks at long intervals, it is blinking at 0.5 Hz, that is, on for 1s and thenoff for 1s.

● If an indicator blinks at short intervals, it is blinking at 4 Hz, that is, on for 0.125s andthen off for 0.125s.

● If an indicator blinks at super short intervals, it is blinking at 10 Hz, that is, on for 0.05sand then off for 0.05s.

● Blinking intermittently at short intervals means an indicator blinks at super shortintervals for 0.5s and then remains off for 0.5s.

Networking Switch

Table 3-75 Networking switch description

Name Definition Function

Button pressing Press the button forless than 1s.

iBOX blinking function

Button pressing Press and hold thebutton for morethan 1s but lessthan 5s.

Creates a network if no networkhas been created. Switchesbetween network organization anddata transmission if a network hasbeen created.




Button holdingdown

Press and hold thebutton for morethan 10s but lessthan 20s.

Clears the current network(including the network parametersof all the online iBATs).

Default Button

Table 3-76 Default button description


Default button Hold down thebutton for morethan 10s.

Reset to the default IP address(192.168.0.10)

3.2.19.2 iBATThe iBAT is a battery monitoring module that monitors the voltages, internalresistances, and pole temperatures of batteries and supports 12 V power.

Features● Monitors the voltages, internal resistances, and pole temperatures of

batteries.● Supports the hibernation function. (When it detects that the battery voltage is

low, it will enter the low-power mode.)● Communicates with the iBOX wirelessly.

iBAT Appearance

Figure 3-50 iBAT2.0



Figure 3-51 iBAT3.0

Indicators

Table 3-77 Indicators

Indicator Color SilkScreen

Status Description

Running Green RUN Off Power consumption is low orthe iBAT is not powered on.

Blinking atsuper shortintervals

The networking has startedbut not completed.

Blinking atlong intervals

The networking succeeds.

Alarm Red ALM Off The iBAT is not faulty.

Steady on ● The iBAT is faulty.● Communication with the

iBOX times out.● No network is connected.

(The iBAT is waiting toconnect to a network.)

Blinking atsuper shortintervals(iBattery 2.0)

● Network parameters arebeing cleared.

● The iBAT is blinking.

Blinking atshortintervals(iBattery 3.0)



NO TE

● If an indicator blinks at long intervals, it is blinking on for 1s and then off for 1s.● If an indicator blinks at super short intervals, it is blinking at 10 Hz, that is, on for 0.05s

and then off for 0.05s.● If an indicator blinks at short intervals, it is blinking at 4 Hz, that is, on for 0.125s and

then off for 0.125s.

Networking Switch

Table 3-78 Networking switch description


Buttonpressing

Press the button forless than 5 seconds.

Searches for and joins a network ifthere is no network. Initializes thenetwork parameters if there is anetwork.

Buttonholding down

Hold down thebutton for morethan 5s.

Clears the current network and resetsthe wireless module; disconnects thenetwork.



4 UI Description

4.1 WebUIFor data transmission security, the ECC800-Pro supports WebUI access throughTLS.

Figure 4-1 Home page

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 4 UI Description


WebUI Introduction

Table 4-1 WebUI Introduction

MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu

Function FactoryDefaultsRestorationa

Remarks

Home Plan View – ● View andmanage thelayout view ofdevices.

● View thesystem PUE(including theinstantaneousmPUE valueand averagePUE value) in adashboard andthe systemtrend curve. b

Yes –

ActiveAlarms

– View activealarms.

No –

Multi-ModuleMonitoringc

– View the status ofeach cascadedECC800-Pro.

Yes –

Monitoring

System Connecteddevices, suchas ECC800-Pro, ETHConverterGroup, andSmart ETHGatewayGroup.

Monitor thedevice runninginformation inreal time, setdevice runningparameters, andcontrol the devicerunning. Forexample, setsmart coolingproductparameters, deletedevices failing incommunication,and set AIDIdeviceparameters.

Yes For example, in thepath of Monitoring >ECC800 > RunningParameters:● AIDI_1 sensor-

AIDI_5 sensor isDisable by default.

● IP device num is 100by default.

● Online detectiontimeout interval is30 by default.



MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu


Remarks

PowerDistribution

Connecteddevices, suchas IntegratedPDU,PDU8000, andPowerDistributionUnit

Yes –

Aisle Connecteddevices, suchas Multi-FunctionalSensor Group,AccessActuatorGroup, andSkylightActuatorGroup

Yes –

Cooling Connectedsmart coolingproducts.

Yes –

Cabinet IT cabinet Yes –

Query HistoricalAlarms

– Query historicalalarms.

No –

Performance Data

– Query deviceperformance data.

No –

OperationLog

– Query operationlogs.

No –

AccessEvent

– Query accesscontrol events.

No –

ExportData

– Export historicaldata and devicedata.

No –



MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu


Remarks

SystemSettings

SystemParameters

SiteConfiguration

Set the systemtype, site ID, andnetwork securitycertificate.

Yes Smart module name isFusionModule bydefault.System type isFusionModule2000 bydefault.NOTE

If System type isGeneral, ECC800-Pro is ageneral collector thatcollects device data andreports the data to thenorthbound NMS.

Monitor IP Set the IP addressfor the monitoringmodule.

No ● IP for WAN_1 is192.168.8.10 bydefault.

● The default IPaddresses of PrimaryDNS server andSecondary DNSserver in the DNSServer Address areaare 192.168.8.10.

● IP for WAN_2 is192.168.0.10 bydefault.

Time Set the time zone,time, and date.

No –

AccessManagement

– Set the accessusers andpermissions.

No –

VideoManagement

– Add, modify, ordelete videos.

Yes –

NMSApplication

NetEco Set SNMP andNetEcocommunicationsparameters.

Yes Server IP is192.168.8.11 by default.Port number is 31220by default.The Network port forlink establishment isWAN_1.



MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu


Remarks

SNMP Yes SNMP version isSNMPv3 by default.SNMP port number is161 by default.

TransparentTransmissionChannel

Set thetransparenttransmissionfunction of thedevice and uploadthe networksecuritycertificate.

Yes TransparentTransmission ThroughCOM Ports is Disableby default.Enable securityauthentication isEnable by default.

DeviceManagement

DeviceAddition

Add devices orreplace thesecurity certificatefor device access.

No –

SecurityCertificationChange

No –

SmartModuleCascading

– Cascade up tothree ECC800-Prosthrough multi-moduleconfiguration.

Yes –

PUEConfiguration

– Set PUEparameters.

Yes PUE Function is Enableby default.PUE configurationmode is Standard bydefault.

LinkageControl

– Set PLC linkagerules.

Yes –

AlarmParameters

Basic AlarmParameters

Set basic alarmparameters andalarm associationparameters.

Yes –

AlarmLinkage

Yes –

PerformanceParameters

PerformanceParameters

Enable or disablethe deviceperformancestatistics function.

Yes –



MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu


Remarks

AllConfiguredData

View theperformance datafor which thestatistics functionis enabled ordisabled.

Yes –

EventNotification

Email Settings Set alarmnotification modeto be over emailand SMS.

Yes –

SMS Settings Yes –

AlarmNotification

Yes –

SignalNameModify

– Modify signalnames.

Yes –

Maintenance

SoftwareUpgrade

SoftwareUpgrade

Upgrade thesoftware of theECC800-Pro andits southbounddevices online.

Yes –

VersionInformation

– Query the deviceversion and accesspackage version,such as thesoftware versionand hardwareversion.

No –

E-Label – Query or export E-labels.

No –

UserManagement

– Manage users,such as adding,modifying, anddeleting users.

No –

Configuration File

– Import and exportconfiguration filesto configuredevices quickly,and restorefactory defaults.

No –

FaultInformation

– Export faultinformation.

No –



MainMenu

Second-LevelMenu

Third-LevelMenu


Remarks

APPObtaining

– Download the appinstallationpackage byscanning the QRcode.

No –

ParameterSync

– ● Synchronizedeviceparameters toquickly importdata ofsouthbounddevices (suchas the multi-functionalsensor andskylightactuator).

● Support devicereplacemente.

No –

AccessPackageMgmt

– View accesspackageinformation.

No –

ConfigurationWizardd

– Support thedeploymentwizard and setsimple parametersas instructed bythe wizard.

No –

● a: The factory settings can be restored only on the WebUI.● b: If the system type is FusionModule800, only the intelligent power distribution scenario is

supported.● c: Multi-Module Monitoring is displayed on the Home page only after you set Smart Module

Cascading.● d: If the system type is FusionModule2000 or FusionModule5000, this function is unavailable.● e: This function is available only in some customized projects.



4.2 Mobile Phone App

Figure 4-2 Home screen

Table 4-2 Mobile phone app functions

Screen Function

Home Allows you to view the device layout diagram, energy,environment, resource consumption, and alarms.

iPower Allows you to view the running status and alarm status ofall branches on the power supply and distribution linkspage, and has the self-diagnosis function.

iCooling Allows you to view the cooling distribution in smartmodules and operating status of components on thecooling link diagram page.

More Monitor Allows you to view details about devices under themonitoring system, power distribution, aisle, cooling, andcabinet types.

SoftwareUpgrade

Allows you to upgrade the software using a USB flash driveor locally.

Parameter Sync

-



Screen Function

iFind Allows you to modify the names and positions of devices inthe device layout diagram, and deliver a blinking commandto a device under iFind.

ExportData

Allows you to export device configuration data, currentconfiguration files, and historical data.

ImportData

Allows you to import a configuration file.

Performance Data

Allows you to view device performance data, such as thebattery curve and battery discharge curve.

NetworkParameter

-

Operation Log

-

AccessEvent

-

AssetDetails

Allows you to view device asset details such as electroniclabels of system devices and other devices.

DeviceVersionInfo

Check the Software Version and Hardware Version of thedevice.

4.3 Pad App

Figure 4-3 Home screen



Table 4-3 Pad app functions

Screen Function

Home Allows you to view the device layout diagram, energy,environment, resource consumption, and alarms.

iPower Allows you to view the running status and alarm status ofall branches on the power supply and distribution linkspage, and has the self-diagnosis function.

iCooling Allows you to view the cooling distribution in smartmodules and operating status of components on thecooling link diagram page.

More Monitor Allows you to view details about devices under themonitoring system, power distribution, aisle, cooling, andcabinet types.

SoftwareUpgrade

Allows you to upgrade the software using a USB flash driveor locally.

Parameter Sync

-

iFind Allows you to modify the names and positions of devices inthe device layout diagram, and deliver a blinking commandto a device under iFind.

ExportData

Allows you to export device configuration data, currentconfiguration files, and historical data.

ImportData

Allows you to import a configuration file.

Performance Data

Allows you to view device performance data, such as thebattery curve and battery discharge curve.

NetworkParameter

-

Operation Log

-

AccessEvent

-

AssetDetails

Allows you to view device asset details such as electroniclabels of system devices and other devices.

DeviceVersionInfo

Check the Software Version and Hardware Version of thedevice.



5 Power-On Commissioning

Prerequisites● The hardware and cable installation check is complete for controller

components according to data center specifications and requirements.● The device and ECC800-Pro have been powered on.● You have obtained the ECC800-Pro IP address as well as the user name and

password used for WebUI login.● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as the ECC800-Pro IP

address is prepared, and the PC has connected to the WAN1 port on theECC800-Pro.

Context

After installing or replacing the device or ECC800-Pro, set monitoring parametersand add the device.

5.1 Preparations and WebUI Login

Prerequisites● Supported operating system: Windows 7 and later versions● It is recommended that the screen resolution be 1366 x 768 or higher.● Browser: Chrome, Firefox 32, Internet Explorer 11 or later

Procedure

Step 1 Connect a network cable between the PC network port and the WAN1 port(protected by a security mechanism) on the ECC800-Pro.

Table 5-1 Default IP addresses for the WAN and LAN ports on the ECC800-Pro

Port Default IP Address

WAN1 192.168.8.10

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 5 Power-On Commissioning


Port Default IP Address

WAN2 192.168.0.10192.168.248.10 (FusionModule800)

LAN1 and LAN2 192.168.248.10

NO TICE

● In ECC800 V100R002C10 and earlier versions, the default IP address of portWAN_1 is 192.168.1.10.

● The WAN1 port IP address cannot be set to an IP address in any of thefollowing network segments: 192.168.0.x, 192.168.245.x, 192.168.246.x and192.168.248.x.

● IP addresses for the WAN1 and WAN2 ports should not be set in the samenetwork segment.

● In some customized scenarios, the default IP address for the WAN2 port is192.168.248.10. The default value may vary.

● WAN ports support the Internet access and LAN ports support the intranetaccess. Connect the PC network port to the WAN1 port or LAN port on theECC800-Pro based on the access network.

Step 2 Configure the PC IP address and the WAN1 IP address in the same networksegment.

If the WAN1 port IP address is 192.168.8.10, subnet mask is 255.255.255.0, anddefault gateway is 192.168.8.1, set the PC IP address to 192.168.8.12, subnet maskto 255.255.255.0, and default gateway to 192.168.8.1.

Step 3 Set LAN parameters.

NO TE

● If the ECC800-Pro connects to a LAN and a proxy server has been selected, perform Step3.3 and Step 3.4.

● If the ECC800-Pro connects to the Internet, and the PC in a LAN accesses the Internetover a proxy server, do not perform Step 3.3 and Step 3.4. Otherwise, you will fail toaccess the ECC800-Pro.

1. Open the Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options.2. Click the Advanced tab and select Use TLS1.1 and Use TLS1.2.3. (Optional) Click the Connections tab and select LAN settings.4. (Optional) On Proxy server, clear Use a proxy server for your LAN.5. Click OK.

Step 4 Set Internet Explorer parameters.1. When you use Internet Explorer for access, set Internet Explorer to ensure the

normal display of and operations on the WebUI. Choose Tools >Compatibility View, and add the web access address to the compatibilityview.



2. Choose Tools > Internet options > Security, choose Add the ECC800-Pro IPaddress to the list of trusted sites.

Figure 5-1 Adding an address

3. Enable file download and set the security level of the trusted site to low.

Figure 5-2 Setting parameters

NO TE

When switching between different versions of the ECC800-Pro on your PC, you areadvised to clear the historical Internet Explorer cache. Failing to do so may cause someinformation missed or exception after login. The following provides the details:1. Open Internet Explorer and choose Tools > Internet Options > General.2. Select Delete browsing history on exit and click Delete.3. In the Delete Browsing History dialog box, select all options except Password,

and click Delete.

Step 5 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.1. Enter https://monitoring IP address (such as monitoring IP address https://

192.168.8.10) in the address box of the browser, and then press Enter toenter the WebUI login page.



Figure 5-3 WebUI login page

2. On the login page, enter the preset user name admin and preset passwordChangeme, set the language, and click Log In.

NO TE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure account security andprevent unauthorized network attacks, such as data tampering. Huawei will not beliable for any security issues caused by your failure to change the preset passwordin time or password loss after changing.

– Change the password of the user account periodically.

– Record and keep the password properly. If you forgot the password, you will beunable to log in to the WebUI.

– When the event notification is configured and the password retrieval mode isconfigured under user management, the password can be retrieved.

– An account is logged out due to timeout if no operation is performed within 10minutes after system login.

– A maximum of three users can log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI at the same time.

----End

5.2 Performing Startup Password Authentication (forFusionModule800)

When the system type is FusionModule800, perform the following steps toconfigure it.

Context● The initial startup password authentication is required only during initial

power-on commissioning. If the authentication has been performedsuccessfully, no authentication is required afterward.

● The startup password needs to be authenticated when you restore the defaultsettings on the WebUI or by pressing keys.

● If the startup password authentication is not complete, the ECC800-ProWebUI and app cannot be used for commissioning.



● When the system type is changed to FusionModule800, the startup passwordneeds to be authenticated again.

Procedure

Step 1 Authenticate the startup password on the WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Record the values of Barcode and Verify Code in the displayed Startup

Password dialog box.3. Within 24 hours, inform Huawei technical support of Barcode and Verify

Code to obtain the password. After obtaining the password, enter thepassword in the Password text box and click Submit to complete theauthentication of the startup password.

NO TE

The verification code is valid for 24 hours by default. After the validity period expires,the verification code is automatically updated. You can also click to update theverification code.

Step 2 Use the Service Expert app to authenticate the startup password.1. Download and obtain the app installation package.

Log in to Huawei AppGallery (https://a.vmall.com/), search for ServiceExpert, and tap Download to obtain the installation package.

a. Open the browser on the pad, enter www.baidu.com in the address box,search for Huawei AppGallery, select Ordinary Download, and tapSave.

b. Install the Huawei AppGallery. If the downloaded file exists in the drop-down list box, tap the file to install the Huawei AppGallery. If thedownloaded file does not exist in the drop-down list box, choose File >Local on the desktop, find the Download folder, and tap the HuaweiAppGallery installation package.

2. Install the app.

By default, the Android operating system forbids the installation of apps notobtained from the Android market. Therefore, before installing the app, setthe mobile phone so that it allows the installation of apps from unknownsources.

Tap the app installation file for installation. After the installation is complete,

check that the app icon is displayed on the home screen of themobile phone or pad.

3. Hold down the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for less than 3s to enable theWiFi function.



http://a.vmall.com/

http://a.vmall.com/

NO TE

– The initial password is Changeme after WiFi is enabled. The initial password isvalid only when you press the button for the first time to enable WiFi afterdelivery. If you enable WiFi on the WebUI, there is no default password.

– After the WiFi function is enabled, the password for a mobile phone to connect tothe WiFi network is Changeme. When you log in to the app using a pad, thesystem prompts you to change the password.

– After you disable the WiFi hotspot function on the WebUI and press the buttonagain, the WiFi function is still enabled. In this case, the WiFi password is the oneyou changed last time.

– The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function,change the WiFi password to ensure connection security.

– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen orcracked. The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi passwordonce half a year.

4. Use the Service Expert app to authenticate the startup password.

a. Open the mobile phone app or pad app, and log in to theFusionModule800 device login page using the administrator account.Ensure that the IP address is 192.168.245.10, the default administratorname is admin, and the default password is Changeme.

b. If the message displayed on the page is changed from "Initial startuppassword authentication" to "Activated", the startup passwordauthentication is complete.

NO TE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure system access security.– When the mobile phone app connects to the monitoring system, the WiFi function of

the monitoring system is disabled by default. Before connecting the mobile phone appto the monitoring system, enable the WiFi function on the WebUI. For security, you areadvised to disable the WiFi function when the app is not in use.

– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the password once three months.

– You are advised to use a mobile phone that has not been rooted to reduce the risk ofinformation leakage.

– It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800-ProWebUI and app at the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to theWebUI and app at the same time, either of them will be forcibly logged out.

– The iDCService app supports only the Android system.– The iDCService app is available only in Chinese.

----End

5.3 Commissioning Configuration Wizard

Context● Only administrators are entitled to perform the configuration wizard.● Currently, commissioning wizard is provided for the following functions:

Smart Module Settings, Basic Param Settings, Add Devices, Add Sensor,Plan View, Power Dist Settings, Temp Control Settings, Linkage Test,Video Settings, and Access Management.



Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

NO TE

The configuration wizard is displayed when you log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI for the firsttime or the system type is switched.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration Wizard to access the parameterconfiguring page for the deployment wizard.

Step 3 Configure related parameters on the page as instructed. For details, see thefunction description on the left of the page.

NO TE

● In the process, click Previous, Next, and Skip as required.● To exit before the configuration is complete, click Finish to terminate the configuration

directly.

Step 4 After configuring the parameters, click Finish.

Step 5 After confirming that the commissioning Result is normal, enter the CheckerName and Check Date, and click Configuration Completed.

NO TE

To export the configuration result, click Export Check Result. The export file format is csv.

----End

5.4 Configuring Event NotificationYou can set alarm notification by email or SMS as required. Information about amaximum of 20 users who will receive alarm notification can be displayed.

PrerequisitesTo implement alarm notification by SMS, the following conditions must be met:

● The ECC800-Pro is configured with a 4G module and supports standard SIMcard access.

● The ECC800-Pro is connected to a network with an email server through aWAN port. Both the Internet and local area network (LAN) are supported.

NO TE

To use the WeChat notification function, connect the ECC800-Pro to the EDCM system. Fordetails, see the user guide of the EDCM system.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > Event Notification.

Step 2 Set related outbox parameters.1. Set related parameters in the Outbox Settings area on the Mailbox Settings

page. If the address type of the outbox is Domain name, choose System



Settings > System Parameters, and set related parameters in the DNSServer Address area on the Monitor IP page.

NO TE

The DNS server address is provided by the local network operator.

2. Click Test to check the email sending. If an email fails to be sent, check theoutbox settings and DNS Server Address. If the email is sent successfully,click Submit.

NO TICE

If Test email sending failed is displayed, check whether the receiver's emailserver requires CA certificate verification. If it is required, download the CAcertificate from the receiver's email website and upload it in the MailboxCertificate area.

Figure 5-4 Email setting page

NO TE

The following email addresses are for reference only (the actual parameters apply) and are usedonly for configuring the email function.

Table 5-2 Main parameters on the outbox configuration page

EmailType

EmailServerDomainName

Mailbox ServerIP Address

EncryptionMode andSMTP port

Remarks

Sina Mail smtp.sina.com

How to obtain:1. Click Start

on the PC,enter cmd inRunningarea, and

Non-encryption: 25

● The emailserver mustcomply withthe standardSMTPprotocol to

163 Mail smtp.163.com

Non-encryption: 25;SSL encryption:465



EmailType

EmailServerDomainName

Mailbox ServerIP Address

EncryptionMode andSMTP port

Remarks

126 Mail press Enterto access theadministrator page.

2. Enter pingemail serverdomainname at theposition ofthe blinkingcursor andpress Enterto obtainemail serverIP addresses.

ensure thatthe emailsending andreceivingfunctionsare normal.

● Enter theemail clientauthorization passwordat Passwordfor 163 Mail,126 Mail,and QQMail.

● If the emailtype is notin the list,setparametersby referringto the helpinformationof the emailtype.

smtp.126.com

Non-encryption: 25;SSL encryption:465

QQ Mail smtp.QQ.com

SSL encryption:465

Sohu Mail smtp.sohu.com

Non-encryption: 25


Non-encryption: 25

Hotmail smtp-mail.outlook.com

TLS encryption:587


Non-encryption: 25

Step 3 Add an email address to receive emails.

NO TE

The email address is used only for configuring the email function and is not used for otherpurposes. The address is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to ensure thatthe personal data of users is fully protected.



Figure 5-5 Adding an email address to receive emails

NO TE

Click Test to check whether the added mailbox is available. If it is available, Successfully tosend the test email. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to send the test email. is displayed.Check whether the receiver's mailbox parameters for receiving emails are correctly set.

Step 4 Add a mobile number to receive event notifications.

NO TE

The mobile phone number is used only for configuring the SMS function and is not used forother purposes. The phone number is encrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro toensure that the personal data of users is fully protected.

Figure 5-6 Adding a mobile number



NO TE

Click Test to check whether the added mobile phone number is available. If it is available,Successfully to send the test short message. is displayed. If it is unavailable, Failed to sendthe test short message. is displayed. Check whether the mobile phone number is correctly set.

Step 5 Set the alarm notification delay parameter and the new alarm notificationparameter.

Figure 5-7 Setting the alarm notification parameters

Figure 5-8 Adding alarm notification



NO TICE

Mailbox Address in Alarm Notification can be selected after it is added inMailbox Settings. Mobile Phone Number can be selected after it is added inSMS Settings.

Step 6 Click Confirm to access the re-authentication page. Enter Login password andclick Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

To modify or delete the email parameter settings, click Modify or Delete.

If the email address fails to be set, rectify the fault based on the handlingsuggestions of the error codes listed in the following table. If an error code is notlisted in the following table, provide the ECC run log and contact Huawei technicalsupport.

Table 5-3 Mailbox error codes

Type Error Code Suggestion

Failed toresolve thedomainname.

2 1. Check whether the IP address of the DNSserver is correct.

2. Check whether the domain name of theemail server is correctly configured.

3. Check whether the network communicationbetween the monitoring module and theDNS server is normal.

3 1. Try again later.2. Check whether the domain name of the

email server is correctly configured.

5 Check whether the IP address corresponding tothe domain name of the email server isconfigured.

11 1. Check whether the IP address of the DNSserver is correct.


Failed toconnect tothe emailserver.

22 1. Try again later. This issue occurs when thedomain name is just configured and thedomain name resolution is not complete.

2. Check whether the IP address of the DNSserver is correct.





100 Check whether the local network cable isproperly connected and whether the networkadapter is activated. Ensure that the localnetwork connection is normal.

101 Check the firewall and router configurationsbetween the ECC and the email server toensure that the ECC communicates with theemail server properly.

110 1. Verify that the communication link betweenthe ECC and the email server is normal.

2. Check whether the service port of the emailserver is enabled.

111 Check whether the email server is runningproperly and whether the service port isstarted properly.

112 Check whether the email server is runningproperly.

113 Check the firewall and router configurationsbetween the ECC and the email server toensure that the ECC communicates with theemail server properly.

Failed toestablish asecureconnection.

1 1. Import the CA certificate that matches theemail server certificate.

2. Check the validity period of the certificateand replace it with a valid CA certificate.

3. Provide monitoring run logs and contact theservice center.

Failed to sendthe test email.

504 Check whether the outbox address matchesthe user name for logging in to the emailserver.

535 1. Log in to the email box of the email senderand start the SMTP service.

2. Check whether the user name and passwordfor logging in to the email server arecorrect.

3. Log in to the email box of the email senderand start the third-party client license codefunction.

553 Check whether the outbox address matchesthe user name for logging in to the emailserver.




530 On the outbox configuration page, setEncryption mode to SSL.

554 1. Log in to the email server or contact thepersonnel of the third-party email server tomodify the spam setting rule.

2. Provide ECC run logs and contact the servicecenter.

550 1. Log in to the email server or contact thethird-party email server personnel to addthe IP address to the whitelist.

2. Provide ECC run logs and contact the servicecenter.

421 Reduce the email sending speed or contact thethird-party email server personnel to increasethe email server configuration limit.

450 Contact the personnel of the third-party mailserver to add the sender address to thewhitelist and do not limit the sending rate.

451 Provide ECC run logs and contact the servicecenter to reduce the email sending frequency.

534 Log in to the sender's mailbox client andenable the access to the insecure applications.

5.5 Commissioning the New Main Way

Context● In the new main way scenario, general input units and power distribution

units communicate with the ECC800-Pro using the Modbus-MAC protocol.After the general input units and power distribution units properly connect tothe ECC800-Pro, the ECC800-Pro automatically identifies the units.

● Then, you need to set parameters for the general input units and powerdistribution units; otherwise, a false alarm may be generated.

Procedure

Step 1 Set parameters for general input units on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.1. Set parameters for general input unit 1.



Table 5-4 Power distribution settings for a general input unit

Path ParameterName

DefaultValue

Setting

Monitoring > PowerDistribution > GeneralInput Unit > RunningParameters > PowerDistribution Settings

Rated systemfrequency

50 Set based on actualconditions.

Rated systemvoltage

380 Set based on actualconditions.

Rated systemcurrentNOTE

Thisparameter isnot displayedfor somegeneral inputunits.

250 Set based on actualconditions.NOTE

Set this parameter to avalue consistent with theinformation on thenameplate of the generalinput unit. For example, ifthe model is NMW-0250AC, set Rated systemcurrent to 250 A.

System CTratioNOTE

Thisparameter isnot displayedfor somegeneral inputunits.

250 Set based on actualconditions.For example, if Ratedsystem current is 250A, set System CT ratioto 250.

Upper loadcurrentthreshold

80 When the load currentexceeds the presetvalue, an alarm isgenerated.

Lower loadcurrentthreshold

60 When the load currentis lower than the presetvalue, an alarm isgenerated.

2. Set the parameters for other general input units in the same way or bysynchronizing parameters.

Path: Maintenance > Parameter Sync

Step 2 Set parameters for power distribution units on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

1. (Optional) To modify the branch signal name of the power distribution unit,choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify and access the Batch SignalConfiguration to modify the name, and then tap Submit.

2. The following is an example of how to display two branches for powerdistribution unit1.



Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > General Input Unit > PowerDistribution Unit > Display Configuration, select Branch InformationDisplay corresponding to QF1 and QF2, and then tap Submit.

3. Configure the power distribution settings for power distribution unit 1.

Table 5-5 Power distribution settings for a power distribution unit

Path Parameter Name Default Value

Description

Monitoring >PowerDistribution> GeneralInput Unit1> PowerDistributionUnit >RunningParameters >Unhide AllAdvancedSignals >PowerDistributionSettings

QF1 Rated current (L1)QF2 Rated current (L2)NOTE

This parameter is notdisplayed for somedistribution units.

32 Rated current 32 Afor each branch.

QF1 Branch circuit breakerin use (L1)QF2 Branch circuit breakerin use (L2)

Enable When theparameter is set toDisable for abranch, all alarms ofthe branch will notbe reported.When theparameter is set toEnable for a branch,all alarms of thebranch will bereported.

Upper load currentthreshold

80 When the loadcurrent exceeds thepreset value, analarm is generated.

Lower load currentthreshold

60 When the loadcurrent is lowerthan the presetvalue, an alarm isgenerated.

4. Set the parameters for other power distribution units in the same way or bysynchronizing parameters.

Path: Maintenance > Parameter Sync.

----End

5.6 Commissioning the eLightIf an eLight is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.



Procedure

Step 1 Ensure that the device address of the eLight actuator is the default value 2.

Toggle switches 1 to 4 of the DIP switch specify the device address in binary mode.ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.

Table 5-6 Setting a device address

Address ToggleSwitch 1

ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

1 ON OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF

Step 2 Check the eLight function.

Table 5-7 Function commissioning

Check Method Normal Connection Status

Choose Maintenance > ConfigurationWizard > Linkage Test > eLightController Commissioning and clickTest.

The eLight is lit up in red, green, blue,and white in sequence for 3 secondsrespectively, and then turns off.

Step 3 Set eLight parameters.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. In the Smart Module View, click Modify Device. Select an eLight actuator

under Devices, drag it to the access actuator to which you want to bind theeLight actuator, and click Exit Edit Mode.



Figure 5-9 eLight actuator position

Table 5-8 Access authorization

Access authorization Description

Access authorization fails and theaisle door cannot be opened.

Red light, blinking for 3 seconds

Access authorization succeeds andthe door can be opened.

Green light, blinking for 3 seconds

NO TE

– The eLight actuator is automatically associated with the nearest access actuator in thesmart module view.

– If there are one access actuator and two eLight actuators in an aisle, the accessactuator is automatically associated with the two eLight actuators.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureTo modify the parameters of a single eLight, do as follows:

1. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > eLight Actuator Group > eLight Actuator. TheRunning Parameters page is displayed.

2. Select the Associated alarm severity as required and click Submit.




Item Alarm SeveritySelection

Description

Associatedalarm severity

Critical If there is a critical alarm, theeLight strip light turns on with ared light.

Critical, Major If there are multiple alarms, theeLight strip light preferentiallyturns on with a lightcorresponding to the high-severity alarm. After the high-severity alarm is cleared, theeLight strip light turns on with alight corresponding to the low-severity alarm.NOTE

● Critical: red light● Major: orange light● Minor: yellow light● Warning: white light

Critical, Major,Minor

Critical, Major,Minor, Warning

None The eLight strip light is steadyblue (atmosphere light).

NOTEAfter you set the alarm severity, the eLight indicator is off if no alarm is generated.

5.7 Commissioning the eLight (for FusionModule800)When the system type is FusionModule800 an eLight is installed, perform thefollowing steps to configure it.

Procedure

Step 1 Ensure that the device address of the eLight actuator is the default value 2.




ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

1 ON OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF




ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

4 OFF OFF ON OFF

Step 2 Add an eLight.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add an eLight.

Table 5-11 Adding an eLight

Path Parameter Setting

Choose SystemSettings > DeviceManagement and clickAdd Device. Theparameters for addingdevices are displayed.

Deviceattribute

Select eLight Actuator from thedrop-down list box.

Device Type Select eLight Actuator from thedrop-down list box.

Connect To Select ETH Actuator1 from thedrop-down list box.NOTE

The setting example indicates thatthe eLight Actuator is connectedto the ETH Actuator1.

Communications Port

COM1/COM2

DeviceAddress

Set the device address for theeLight actuator based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the eLight Actuator connects properly.

– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices aredisplayed in the Number of connected devices list.

– If the connection fails, check whether the cable is properly connected tothe device, whether the device is running properly, and whether theparameter settings are consistent with the device parameters.

Step 3 Set eLight parameters.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > eLight Actuator Group > eLight Actuator. The

Running Parameters page is displayed.3. Select the Associated alarm severity as required and click Submit.



Table 5-12 Function check

Item Alarm SeveritySelection

Description

Associatedalarm severity

Critical If there is a critical alarm, theeLight strip light turns on with ared light.

Critical, Major If there are multiple alarms, theeLight strip light preferentiallyturns on with a lightcorresponding to the high-severity alarm. After the high-severity alarm is cleared, theeLight strip light turns on with alight corresponding to the low-severity alarm.NOTE

– Critical: red light– Major: orange light– Minor: yellow light– Warning: white light

Critical, Major,Minor

Critical, Major,Minor, Warning

None The eLight strip light is steadyblue (atmosphere light).

NOTEAfter you set the alarm severity, the eLight indicator is off if no alarm is generated.

Step 4 If there are multiple eLights, repeat Step 1–Step 3.

----End

5.8 Commissioning the PDU2000 (forFusionModule800)

When the system type is FusionModule800 and a PDU2000 is installed, performthe following steps to configure it.

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port onthe PDU2000 and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ETHconverter.



Context

Table 5-13 PDU2000 basic Information

Vendor Name Displayed on theWebUI

Eleventh and TwelfthCharacters in DeviceBarcodea

Clever PDU2000-M(C) FT

Haipengxin PDU2000-M(H) 6B

a: The barcode starts with 21 and is attached to the device.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the PDU2000 monitoring parameters.● Set the PDU2000-M (C) monitoring parameters.

NO TE

The display of a single-phase module is used as an example.

– After the PDU2000-M (C) is powered on, the LCM displays theinitialization screen.

Figure 5-10 PDU2000-M (C) initialization screen

– Press MENU to enter the device communications address screen.

Figure 5-11 PDU2000-M (C) communications settings

– Press DOWN and UP to select the address to be set.



– Press MENU to confirm the settings.

NO TE

The parameter settings take effect only if you press MENU and then thePDU2000-M (C) buzzes and restarts. If you do not press MENU, the PDU2000-M(C) buzzes and restarts automatically after 30s and the settings are not saved.

● Set the PDU2000-M (H) monitoring parameters.

NO TE


– After the PDU2000-M (H) is powered on, press MENU. The LCM displays

.– Press MENU again to access the device communications address screen.

Figure 5-12 PDU2000-M (H) communications settings

– Press DOWN and UP to select the address to be set.– Press MENU to confirm the settings.

NO TE

If modification is successful, is displayed: If modification fails,

is displayed:

Step 2 Add a PDU2000.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a PDU2000.

Table 5-14 Adding a PDU2000


ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. The

Deviceattribute

Select PDU from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select PDU2000-M (C) or PDU2000-M(H) from the drop-down list box based onthe actual device.




parametersfor addingdevices aredisplayed.

Connect To Select ETH Actuator1 from the drop-downlist box.NOTE

The setting example indicates that thePDU2000 is connected to the ETH Actuator1.

Communications Port

COM1/COM2

DeviceAddress

Enter the actual device address of thePDU2000.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDU2000 connects to the ECC800-Pro properly.


– If the connection fails, check whether the cable is properly connected tothe device, whether the device is running properly, and whether theparameter settings are consistent with the device parameters.

----End

5.9 Commissioning Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock (forFusionModule800)

When the system type is FusionModule800 and the cabinet electronic clasp locksare installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of odd- and even-numbered cabinets have

been cascaded in hand-in-hand mode respectively. One end of a networkcable is connected to the RS485_IN port on the first cabinet electronic clasplock of an odd-numbered cabinet, and the other end of the cable is connectedto the COM2 port on the ECC800-Pro; one end of another network cable isconnected to the RS485_IN port on the first cabinet electronic clasp lock of aneven-numbered cabinet, and the other end of the cable is connected to theCOM3 port on the ECC800-Pro.

● The smart module view has been deployed.

● The cabinet door can be opened and closed properly. If the cabinet doorcannot be opened and closed properly, adjust the position of the cabinetelectronic clasp lock by performing steps 1 and 2.

Procedure

Step 1 (Optional) Check whether the cabinet door lock is leveled to 2000 (+3) mm. Ifnot, adjust it.



Step 2 (Optional) If the cabinet door still cannot be opened after step 1 is performed,adjust the position of the cabinet electronic clasp lock by using the slotted holesuntil the cabinet door can be opened and closed properly.

Step 3 Set device addresses for cabinet electronic clasp locks.

● A cabinet electronic clasp lock is installed at the front and rear doors of eachcabinet respectively. The address for the cabinet electronic clasp lock on thefront door is an odd number, and that for the cabinet electronic clasp lock onthe rear door is an even number.

● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of odd-numbered cabinets are connected inseries. The addresses start from 1, and a maximum of 12 cabinet electronicclasp locks can be connected in series.

● The cabinet electronic clasp locks of even-numbered cabinets are connectedin series. The addresses start from 1, and a maximum of 12 cabinet electronicclasp locks can be connected in series.

● Set a device address for a cabinet electronic clasp lock by operating the DIPswitch on the cabinet electronic clasp lock. Toggle switches 1 to 6 specify thedevice address in binary mode. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.



ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

5 ON OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

6 OFF ON ON OFF OFF OFF

7 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF

8 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

9 ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF

11 ON ON OFF ON OFF OFF

12 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF

Step 4 Add the cabinet electronic clasp locks.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.

2. Create a cabinet view in Smart Module View on the home page.

3. Add a cabinet electronic clasp lock.



Table 5-16 Adding an E-LOCK


Choose System Settings> Device Managementand click Add Device.The parameters foradding devices aredisplayed.

Deviceattribute

Elock

Device Type E-LOCK

Connect To ECC800

Communications Port

odd-numbered cabinets: COM2even-numbered cabinets: COM3

DeviceAddress

Enter the actual device address ofthe cabinet electronic clasp lock.

4. Click Test Connect to check whether the connection between the cabinet

electronic clasp lock and the ECC800-Pro is normal.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are

displayed in the Number of connected devices list.– If the connection fails, check whether the device is properly connected to

the ECC800-Pro, whether the device and ECC800-Pro are runningproperly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with thedevice parameters.

5. Connect the electronic locks of other cabinets.

Step 5 Commission the cabinet electronic clasp locks.


Function Path Setting

Viewcabinetelectronicclasp lockinformation

ChooseMonitoring >Cabinet >ITCabinet101> E-LOCK1.a

Click the RunningInfo tab.

View the running informationabout cabinet electronic clasplock 1 on the WebUI.

Change acabinetelectronicclasp lockname

Click the RunningParameters tab.

Change the cabinet electronicclasp lock name.

Remotelyopen acabinetelectronicclasp lock

Click the Controlstab.

Select Open front door or Openback door from the Cabinetdoor control drop-down list box,and click Submit to remotelyopen the door.



Function Path Setting

Opencabinetelectronicclasp locksin batches

Choose Monitoring > Cabinet,click the Controls tab

Select Open front door, Openback door, or Open all doorsfrom the Open the door drop-down list box, select the setting,and click Submit. The cabinetelectronic clasp locks unlock thedoors in batches based on thesignal value.

a: Intelligent lock 1 of IT cabinet 101 is used as an example.

----End



6 Feature Description

6.1 Setting Device Performance Parameters

Context● Setting device performance parameters will affect the storage of device

performance data.● By setting the period for collecting device performance data, you can record

the performance data of the device running status.● If you need to change parameters such as Collecting Data, refer to the

following procedure.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > Performance Parameters.

Step 2 Set device performance parameters on the Performance Parameters page. Selectthe device to be set under Device Type and click Confirm. All performanceparameters of the selected device are displayed.

Figure 6-1 Performance parameter setting page

Step 3 Set device performance parameters, select the performance parameters to besubmitted in the first column, set Collecting Data, and click Submit. After the

parameters are successfully submitted, is displayed in the setting result of the

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 6 Feature Description


changed parameters, and the numbers of parameters that are successfullychanged and failed to be changed are displayed beside Submit.

Step 4 Select the All Configured Data tab page to view the configured deviceperformance parameters.

----End

6.2 Setting ECC800-Pro CascadingIf multiple smart modules (≤ 3) are installed in the same room and the customerhas not deployed the NetEco, multiple ECC800-Pros can be cascaded formanagement. To set the cascading function, follow the procedure in this section.

PrerequisitesCascaded ECC800-Pros communicate with each other properly.

ContextA maximum of three ECC800-Pros can be cascaded. After the IP addresses of othersmart module ECC800-Pros in the room are added to an ECC800-Pro, their activealarms and PUE data can be displayed and viewed.

You can click links on the cascading management page of the master ECC800-Proto display the login pages of the other ECC800-Pros. Then, you can log in to viewthe details.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > Smart Module Cascading.

Step 3 Click Add. In the displayed New Smart Module Cascading dialog box, enter theIP addresses of the ECC800-Pros to be cascaded.

Step 4 Click Confirm.

Step 5 Choose Home > Multi-Module Monitoring. The information about the cascadedECC800-Pros is displayed.



Figure 6-2 ECC800-Pro cascading page

Step 6 (Optional) Click the alarm bubble in the Active alarms area in a smart module toview the corresponding active alarm information.

Step 7 (Optional) Click the pencil icon next to a smart module name, and the Edit SmartModule Title dialog box is displayed. Change the smart module name and clickConfirm.

Step 8 (Optional) Click Link in a smart module on the cascading page to access thecorresponding ECC800-Pro login page.

Step 9 (Optional) Filter and query the details of each alarm by smart module, device, oralarm severity in the Active alarms area.

----End

6.3 Access Management

6.3.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor

6.3.1.1 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI port onthe Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit)

If a door status sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Context● To use the AI/DI sensor, enable the corresponding AI/DI port and name the

sensor. After that, the specific alarm can be reported.● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● If multiple door status sensors are connected, commission one door status

sensor first and then commission the other door status sensors in the sameway.



Procedure

Step 1 Set parameters for a door status sensor.

NO TE

In this example, the door status sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the independentdeployment AI_DI 1.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device Type to Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit, set Device Name

to Independent Deployment AI_DI1 Unit, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Door1

and click Submit.

NO TE

Order number of door sensor name is same as cabinet.

5. Choose Monitoring > System > Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit Group> Independent Deployment AI_DI1 Unit > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1Port Settings.

6. Set Door1 sensor to Enable and click Submit.7. Set Door1 sensor type to Door sensor, ensure that Door1 power supply is

Yes, and click Submit.8. Perform the preceding operations to set parameters for ports AI/DI_2 to AI/

DI_8.

Step 2 Check the door status sensor functions.



Open the cabinet door. Door1 DI alarm is generated on the activealarm page of the app or WebUI.

----End

6.3.1.2 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port onthe Rack Environment Unit)


Context● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● If multiple door status sensors are connected, commission one door status




Procedure

Step 1 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet1 > Cabinet Collector1 > RunningParameters, set the door status sensor parameters.

Table 6-2 Parameter settings

Settingarea

Object Method

AI/DI_1PortSettings

Frontdoorstatus(AI/DI_1)

1. Choose AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, click Submit.2. Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Door sensor, click Submit.

AI/DI_2PortSettings

Reardoorstatus(AI/DI_2)

1. Choose AI/DI_2 sensor to Enable, click Submit.2. Set AI/DI_2 sensor type to Door sensor, click Submit.




Close and then open thedoor.

If the alarm is enabled for the front and reardoors, a cabinet door open alarm is displayed onthe active alarm screen of the app or the activealarm page of the WebUI.

----End

6.3.1.3 Commissioning a Door Status Sensor (Connected to the AI/DI Port onthe UIM20A Expansion Module)



sensor. After that, the specific alarm can be reported.● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● If multiple door status sensors are connected, commission one door status


Procedure

Step 1 Set parameters for a door status sensor.



NO TE

In this example, the door status sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the userinterface module1.


Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device Type to UIM, set Device Name to UIM1, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Door1

and click Submit.

NO TE

Order number of door sensor name is same as cabinet.

5. Choose Monitoring > System > UIM Group > UIM1 > Running Parameters> AI/DI_1 Port Settings.


Yes, and click Submit.8. Perform the preceding operations to set parameters for ports AI/DI_2 to AI/

DI_8.





----End

6.3.1.4 Commissioning the Door Status Sensor (Connected to the ECC800-Pro)

ContextIf the sensor is preinstalled, only check its settings.

Procedure

Step 1 For a single cabinet, set the door status sensor parameters.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Door1

and click Submit.



5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3Port Settings.

6. Set Door1 sensor to Enable, set Door1 sensor type to Door sensor, and clickSubmit.

Step 2 If the number of cabinets is less than or equal to 2, set the door status sensorparameters.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Door1

and click Submit. Change the new signal name of AI/DI_5 to Door2 and clickSubmit.





Step 3 If there are more than two cabinets, set the door status sensor parameters.1. Set door status sensor parameters for the IT cabinet by referring to step 1.2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device Type to UIM, set Device Name to UIM1, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Door2

and click Submit.

NO TE

Order number of door sensor name is same as that of the cabinet.

5. Choose Monitoring > System > UIM Group > UIM1 > Running Parameters> AI/DI_1 Port Settings.


set to Yes, and click Submit.8. Perform the preceding operations to set parameters for ports AI/DI_2 to AI/

DI_8.







----End

6.3.2 Commissioning an Access Control Device and a CabinetElectronic Lock or Fingerprint Lock

If an access control device and cabinet electronic lock or fingerprint lock areinstalled, perform the following steps to configure them.

PrerequisitesWhen the fingerprint reader is connected to the ECC800-Pro for the first time, thepermissions need to be synchronized.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the access user management and access permission management.1. Choose System Settings > Access Management to access the access

management page. The system supports the management of various accesspermissions through the access card, password, and fingerprint.

2. Click Authentication Mode and set the authorization mode for theFusionModule Actuator or access actuator.

Select Card, Fingerprint, Card and password, Card and fingerprint,Fingerprint and password, Card, password and fingerprint or Card,password or fingerprint.

NO TE

The following describes how to set the access actuator.



Figure 6-3 Set Authentication Mode

NO TE

– If the access actuator version is V139 or later, the access actuator supports theauthentication mode by card, password, or fingerprint.To query the access actuator version, choose Maintenance > Version Information.View the version in the Device Version list.

– If you set the authorization mode to Combination, for example, Card, passwordand fingerprint, you need to first swipe your card, enter the password, press thepound key (#), and then enter the fingerprint. The door can be opened only afterverification of all the three items is successful.

– If you set the authorization mode to Card, password or fingerprint, when you usethe password to enable the access control, enter the password in the format ofuser ID*password#. If you enter an incorrect password or user ID, press * on thekeyboard of the access controller to stop the authentication process. Then, enteruser ID*password#.To query the user ID, log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator. ChooseSystem Settings > Access Management. In the Authorization area, view the userID corresponding to the user name.

3. Select the configured access actuator and click OK to complete setting theauthorization mode.

4. On the Authorization Operations tab page, click Add to access the new userpage. On the Basic Info tab page, enter User name and Employee ID.

Specify the following information on the Password tab.

– Password: Enter and confirm the password.– Card number: The card number can be recorded directly or by swiping the

card.

▪ Record directly: Type the access card number in the text box.

▪ Record by swiping the card: Click Swipe Card and place the card onthe access control device. The card number is automatically recorded.

– Fingerprint: On the Fingerprint tab page, select Fingerprint for Selectfingerprint reader and click Scan Fingerprint. On the Please collect



fingerprint page, click OK. Then put your finger on the fingerprint readerto collect the fingerprint after hearing the voice prompt. After you hear abeep sound, move your finger away and collect the fingerprint again.

NO TE

▪ Place your finger in the correct way and wait for more than 0.5s. You need torecord each fingerprint for three times.

▪ A maximum of three fingerprints from different fingers can be recorded.

▪ The fingerprint information is used only for configuring the access controlfunction and is not used for other purposes. The fingerprint information isencrypted during transmission in the ECC800-Pro to ensure that the personaldata of users is fully protected.

▪ The cabinet fingerprint lock does not support access user registration. Accessusers can be registered only on the aisle access control device, and theregistered information is sent to the cabinet fingerprint lock through theECC800-Pro.

Figure 6-4 Recording fingerprints

Figure 6-5 Adding access users

On the Authorization Information and Term of Authorization tab pages,select access users whose access permissions are to be set, and setAuthorized Device, Authorization Mode, Cabinet Lock, Start time, and Endtime.



– Access Actuator: Select the authorized access actuator for the user basedon the actual requirements. For example, select Access Actuator1 on theAccess Actuator tab.

– Cabinet lock: Select the E-LOCK or Fingerprint Lock authorized for theuser.

– Permission validity period: Set Start time, End time.

Figure 6-6 Adding access permissions

NO TE

You can authorize and delete access users in batches.

5. Click OK to complete the task of adding access management settings.6. On the Authorization Operations tab page, click Synchronize to Device,

select the modified access control devices, and click Start Synchronization.

Figure 6-7 Synchronizing access permissions

7. When Synchronization Status is Synchronization completed for the relateddevices, close the Synchronize Access Permission page.

Step 2 Set an alarm for card readers.

Set Logical level configuration for reader removed based on the fingerprintreader configured for the access control system.



● If the access control system uses a Card and password reader, chooseMonitoring > Aisle > Access Actuator Group > Access Actuator n on theECC800-Pro WebUI, click Running Parameters, and set Logical levelconfiguration for reader removed of the corresponding card reader to Highlevel alarm.

Table 6-6 Setting method

Cable Connection Scenario Setting Method

The card reader with a keypad isconnected to WG_1 port on theaccess actuator.

Set Logical level configuration forreader 1 removed to High level alarm.Logical level configuration for reader 2removed remains as Low level alarm.

The card reader with a keypad isconnected to WG_2 port on theaccess actuator.

Set Logical level configuration forreader 2 removed to High level alarm.Logical level configuration for reader 1removed remains as Low level alarm.

● If the access control system uses a Card, Card and fingerprint, or Card,

password and fingerprint reader, retain the default value Low level alarmfor Logical level configuration for reader removed.

Step 3 Check the functions of the access control device and access actuator.



Method 1: Attempt to open the doorusing the configured authenticationmode.Method 2: On the WebUI, chooseMonitoring > Aisle > Access ActuatorGroup > Access Actuator n, and clickControls to open the door remotely.

For method 1: The aisle door is openedsuccessfully.For method 2: After you choose Query> Access Event on the WebUI, you canview the type of this access controlevent.

Step 4 Check the functions of the cabinet electronic lock or fingerprint lock.




Device Check Method Normal Connection Status

Cabinetelectronic lock

Method 1: Ensure that thecabinet door is closed, andattempt to open the door withan IC card.Method 2: On the WebUI,choose Monitoring > Cabinet> IT Cabinet n > E-LOCK n,and click Controls to open thedoor remotely.

For method 1: Swipe anauthorized IC card, press thelower part of the cabinetelectronic lock when the greenindicator blinks, and open thecabinet electronic lock.For method 2: After thecabinet electrical lock isremotely opened, press thelower part of the cabinetelectronic lock after the greenindicator blinks, and open thecabinet electronic lock. ChooseQuery > Access Event on theWebUI. You can view the typeof this access control event.

Fingerprintlock

Method 1: Ensure that thecabinet door is closed, andattempt to open the door withan IC card or authorizedfingerprint.Method 2: On the WebUI,choose Monitoring > Cabinet> IT Cabinet n > FingerprintLock n, and click Controls toopen the door remotely.

Method 1: Place an IC card orauthorized fingerprint over thefingerprint lock. When theindicator of the cabinetelectronic lock blinks blue,press the lower part of thefingerprint lock to open it.Method 2: When the indicatorof the fingerprint lock blinksblue after remote unlocking,press the lower part of thefingerprint lock to unlock it.Choose Query > Access Eventon the WebUI. You can viewthe type of this access controlevent.

----End

6.3.3 Commissioning the Exit Button, Skylight Button,Atmosphere Light, Emergency Button, and Magnetic Lock

Procedure

Step 1 Check functions of the exit button.





Attempt to open the door by pressingthe exit button when the aisle door isclosed.

The aisle door is opened successfully.

Step 2 Check functions of the skylight button.



Attempt to open the door by pressingthe skylight button when the aisledoor is closed.

The skylight can be opened manually.

Step 3 Check functions of the atmosphere light.



Press the atmospherelight button.

The atmosphere light is steady blue.

Step 4 Check functions of the emergency button.


Check Method Normal ConnectionStatus

Follow-up Procedure

Attempt to open the doorby pressing the emergencybutton when the aisledoor is closed.

The aisle door isopened successfully.

You need to restore theemergency button.

Step 5 Check functions of the magnetic lock.





Troubleshooting

When the aisle door isnormally closed, checkwhether there is a dooropen alarm on theECC800-Pro.

There is no dooropen alarm on theECC800-Pro.

If a door open alarm isreported when the door isclosed, relocate themagnetic lock and magnetto minimize the deviationuntil the door open alarmis cleared.

----End

6.3.4 Commissioning an Emergency Door Release Button

Procedure

Step 1 Check the function of an emergency door release button.



Follow-up Procedure

When the room door isproperly closed, short-circuit the wiringterminals NC and COMor NO and COM on theemergency door releasebutton.

The room door is openedproperly.

Remove the short-circuitcable from the wiringterminals NC and COMor NO and COM on theemergency door releasebutton.

----End

6.4 Video Management

6.4.1 Reference DocumentationBefore commissioning a camera, prepare the following documents in addition tothis document.

Table 6-15 Documentation for commissioning

Component Document

IPC6325-WD-VR IPC6325-WD-VR Configuration Guide



Component Document

C3220 Huawei C Series SDC 8.0.1 Product Documentation

VCN500/VCN510/VCN520/VCN540

VCN500: VCN500 Product DocumentationVCN510/VCN520/VCN540:VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 Product Documentation

IVS1800 IVS1800 8.1.0 Product Documentation

6.4.2 Networking Scenarios

Smart ETH Gateway Networking Scenario● If there are multiple VCNs or IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you are

advised to evenly distribute the cameras to each VCN or IVS1800.● The number of cameras and VCNs or IVS1800s in a single smart module must

be less than 4.

Figure 6-8 Camera + VCN or IVS1800 connecting to the smart ETH gateway

NO TICE

● To ensure the normal operating of the ECC800-Pro, avoid high data traffic, suchas the concurrent display of dynamic monitoring of cameras and VCN orIVS1800 video playback.

● To ensure the normal operating of ECC800-Pro services, you can view videofrom a maximum of two cameras concurrently.

LAN Switch Networking ScenarioIf there are multiple VCNs or IVS1800s for multiple smart modules, you areadvised to evenly distribute the cameras to each VCN or IVS1800.



Figure 6-9 Camera + VCN or IVS1800 connecting to the LAN switch

6.4.3 Commissioning a Camera (Smart ETH GatewayNetworking Scenario)

6.4.3.1 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera

Prerequisites● If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera and

disconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning theconnected camera, commission other cameras in the same way.

● The camera has connected to the smart ETH gateway and the smart ETHgateway communicates properly with the ECC800-Pro.

● The camera software version is later than V500R019C30.

Context● Before commissioning the IPC6325 camera, set the IP address for the IPC6325

camera based on customer requirements.● Configure the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 and

the IP address of the LAN port on the ECC800-Pro in the same networksegment.

● Configure the external IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 andthe IP address of the WAN_1 port on the ECC800-Pro in the same network.

● Set the internal and external IP addresses as planned by the customer. Thefollowing IP addresses are for reference only.



Table 6-16 IP address planning

Device Internal IP Address External IP Address

Camera Example: 192.168.248.50; range:192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199

Camera external IPaddressNOTE

The 192.168.246.Xnetwork segmentcannot be set.

VCN/IVS1800

Example: 192.168.248.51; range:192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199

VCN or IVS1800external IP addressNOTE


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the camera web system and enable ONVIF.1. Remove the network cables that connect the smart ETH gateway to the LAN1

and LAN2 ports on the ECC800-Pro.2. Use a network cable to connect the PC to the PoE port on the smart ETH

gateway. Then, set the local IP address of the PC to 192.168.0.11.3. Remove the camera shell and press the reset button for 6s to 10s to restart

the camera.

Figure 6-10 Reset button

(1) Reset button

4. Open a web browser, enter https://192.168.0.120 in the address box, andpress Enter. Enter the default user name admin and preset passwordHuaWei123, and click Log In. The camera WebUI is displayed.



NO TE

You need to set your Internet Explorer browser at your first login. For details abouthow to set your Internet Explorer browser, see Table 6-17.

Table 6-17 Internet Explorer settings

Settings Procedure

Disable the proxy server. 1. Choose Tools > InternetOptions.The Internet Options dialog boxis displayed.

2. Click the Connections tab.3. Click LAN Settings.4. Deselect Use a proxy for your

LAN.5. Click OK.

Enable the ActiveX controls andplug-ins or set them to the promptmode.

1. Choose Tools > InternetOptions.The Internet Options dialog boxis displayed.

2. Click the Security tab.3. Select Internet.4. Click Custom level.

The Security Settings-InternetZone dialog box is displayed.

5. Set Automatic prompting forActiveX controls to Enable, andset Download unsigned ActiveXcontrols and Initialize andscript ActiveX controls notmarked as safe for scripting toPrompt.

6. Click OK.



Settings Procedure

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTEYou must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2when the Hypertext Transfer ProtocolSecure (HTTPS) protocol is used toaccess the camera. Otherwise thecamera WebUI cannot be accessed.


2. Click the Advanced tab.3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS 1.2.4. Click OK.

Set Use Pop-up Blocker to Disable. 1. Choose Tools > InternetOptions.The Internet Options dialog boxis displayed.



5. Set Use Pop-up Blocker toDisable.

6. Click OK.

5. Choose Settings > Network > Platform Connection > Second Protocol

Parameters, and select Enable ONVIF.

Figure 6-11 ONVIF parameters

6. Remove the network cable from the PC to the PoE port on the ETH gateway.7. Connect the PC to the LAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro using a network cable,

and reconnect the network cable between the smart ETH gateway and theLAN2 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Step 2 Set the IP address for the IPC6325 camera.



1. Enter https://192.168.248.10 in the address box of the browser and pressEnter to access the WebUI login page. After login, choose System Settings >Video Management.

2. (Optional) Click Search.

NO TE

– The search timeout interval is 10s. If the search fails, a search failure message isdisplayed.

– To avoid missing cameras, you can perform Search for multiple times.

3. On the found camera record, click and set the external IP address for thecamera based on the external IP address allocated by the networkadministrator (PC IP address and camera external IP address should be in thesame network segment).

4. Click the link under Link to access and log in to the camera WebUI. Enter thepreset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click LogIn.

Figure 6-12 Clicking the camera access link

5. Choose Settings > Network > TCP/IP, set Way to obtain IPv4 to Use thefollowing IP address and set an IP address to the planned IP address for thecamera. The IP address should be in the range of 192.168.248.50 to192.168.248.199.

Step 3 On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, click Add under Video Information. In the New VideoInformation dialog box that is displayed, enter camera and VCN or IVS1800information.● Name: Enter the camera and VCN or IVS1800 names (for example, Camera1).● External IP: Enter the external IP address of the camera (the actual IP address

planned by the customer prevails).● Internal IP: Enter the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or

IVS1800, for example, 192.168.248.56.

Figure 6-13 Allocated internal IP address of the camera



● Video Type: Select the video type based on the customer's device.● Link: Enter the external IP address of the camera (for example, https://

external IP address of the camera).● Change IP camera ONVIF interface access password: The default password

of ONVIF is HuaWei123, which is different from the web user password. Ifyou have changed the default password for accessing the ONVIF interface ofthe IP camera, enter the new password in Password. Otherwise, the ECC800-Pro cannot collect motion detection alarms from the IP camera.

Figure 6-14 Adding video information

Figure 6-15 IP camera ONVIF interface access password

Step 4 Click Confirm after video information is entered.

Step 5 In the Video Information list, click the link under the Link column and go to thecamera WebUI as prompted.

Step 6 For details about how to commission IP cameras and set parameters for them, seethe documentation delivered with the equipment or obtain the documentation byreferring to the "Preparing Documentation" section.1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through

videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.



2. (Optional) If the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured, configure an SD card. Fordetails, see 6.4.3.2 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera (SD CardConfigured).

3. Choose Settings > Video/Audio/Image > Video, and set camera streamtype, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters, as shown in thefollowing figures.

NO TICE

Set the encoding protocol to H.265.

Figure 6-16 Setting primary stream parameters



Figure 6-17 Setting secondary stream 1 parameters

----End

6.4.3.2 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)

ContextIf the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform thefollowing procedure.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Huawei IPC WebUI.

Step 2 Format the SD card.1. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.2. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.

Step 3 Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.



Figure 6-18 Setting audio and video parameters

NO TE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following table.

Table 6-18 Camera configuration parameters

Condition Result

EncodingProtocol

Resolution FrameRate

I-FrameInterval

MinimumBit RateRequired

SupportedVideoStorageDuration(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1M 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1M 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8M 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1M 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6M 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8M 75



Step 4 Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detectionparameters, and click Save.

Figure 6-19 Setting motion detection parameters

Step 5 Set the deployment policy.

Figure 6-20 Setting the deployment policy

Step 6 Set the alarm linkage policy.

Figure 6-21 Setting the alarm linkage policy

----End



6.4.3.3 Commissioning a C3220 Camera

Prerequisites● If multiple cameras are connected, commission one camera first and then

commission other cameras in the same way.● The camera has connected to the smart ETH gateway and the smart ETH

gateway communicates properly with the ECC800-Pro.● The camera software version is later than SDC 8.0.RC111.

Context● Before commissioning the C3220 camera, set the IP address for the C3220

camera based on customer requirements.● Configure the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 and

the IP address of the LAN port on the ECC800-Pro in the same networksegment.

● Configure the external IP addresses of the camera and VCN or IVS1800 andthe IP address of the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro in the same network.

● Set the internal and external IP addresses as planned by the customer. Thefollowing IP addresses are for reference only.

Table 6-19 IP address planning

Device Internal IP Address External IP Address

Camera Example: 192.168.248.50; range:192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199

Camera external IPaddressNOTE


VCN/IVS1800

Example: 192.168.248.51; range:192.168.248.50–192.168.248.199

VCN or IVS1800external IP addressNOTE


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the camera web system and enable ONVIF.1. Remove the network cables that connect the smart ETH gateway to the LAN1

and LAN2 ports on the ECC800-Pro.2. Use a network cable to connect the PC to the PoE port on the smart ETH

gateway. Then, set the local IP address of the PC to 192.168.0.11.3. Remove the camera shell and press the reset button for 6s to 10s to restart

the camera.



Figure 6-22 Reset button

(1) Reset button

4. Open a web browser, enter https://192.168.0.120 in the address box, andpress Enter. Enter the default user name admin and preset passwordHuaWei123, and click Log In. The camera WebUI is displayed.

NO TE

You need to set your Internet Explorer browser at your first login. For details abouthow to set your Internet Explorer browser, see Table 6-20.


Settings Procedure



LAN.5. Click OK.



Settings Procedure



2. Click the Security tab.3. Click Internet.4. Click Custom level.


5. Set Automatic prompting forActiveX controls to Enable, andset Download unsigned ActiveXcontrols and Initialize and scriptActiveX controls not marked assafe for scripting to Prompt.

6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTEYou must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2when the HTTPS protocol is used toaccess the camera. Otherwise, thecamera WebUI cannot be opened.


2. Click the Advanced tab.3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS

1.2.4. Click OK.





6. Click OK.



5. Choose View > Network/Time > Second Protocol Parameters, and selectEnable ONVIF.

Figure 6-23 ONVIF parameters

6. Remove the network cable from the PC to the PoE port on the ETH gateway.

7. Connect the PC to the LAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro using a network cable,and reconnect the network cable between the smart ETH gateway and theLAN2 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Step 2 Set the IP address for the C3220 camera.

1. Enter https://192.168.248.10 in the address box of the browser and pressEnter to access the WebUI login page. After login, choose System Settings >Video Management.

2. (Optional) Click Search.

NO TE

– The search timeout interval is 10s. If the search fails, a search failure message isdisplayed.

– To avoid missing cameras, you can perform Search for multiple times.

3. On the found camera record, click and set the external IP address for thecamera based on the external IP address allocated by the networkadministrator (PC IP address and camera external IP address should be in thesame network segment).

4. Click the link under Link to access and log in to the camera WebUI. Enter thepreset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, and click LogIn.



Figure 6-24 Clicking the camera access link

5. Choose Settings > Network > TCP/IP, set Way to obtain IPv4 to Use thefollowing IP address and set an IP address to the planned IP address for thecamera. The IP address should be in the range of 192.168.248.50 to192.168.248.199.

Step 3 On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, click Add under Video Information. In the New VideoInformation dialog box that is displayed, enter camera and VCN or IVS1800information.● Name: Enter the camera and VCN or IVS1800 names (for example, Camera1).● External IP: Enter the external IP address of the camera or VCN (the actual IP

address planned by the customer prevails).● Internal IP: Enter the internal IP addresses of the camera and VCN or

IVS1800, for example, 192.168.248.56.

Figure 6-25 Allocated internal IP address of the camera

● Video Type: Select the video type based on the customer's device.● Link: Enter the external IP address of the camera (for example, https://

external IP address of the camera).● Change IP camera ONVIF interface access password: The default password

of ONVIF is HuaWei123, which is different from the web user password. Ifyou have changed the default password for accessing the ONVIF interface ofthe IP camera, enter the new password in Password. Otherwise, the ECC800-Pro cannot collect motion detection alarms from the IP camera.



Figure 6-26 Adding video information

Figure 6-27 Password for accessing the IP camera ONVIF interface

Step 4 After entering the video information, click Confirm.

Step 5 In the Video Information list, click the link under the Link column and go to thecamera WebUI as prompted.

Step 6 For details about how to commission the camera and set parameters, see thedocuments delivered with the device or the documents obtained by referring tothe "Preparing Documentation" section.1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through

videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.2. (Optional) Configure an SD card if the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured.3. Choose Settings > Video/Audio/Image > Video, and set camera stream

type, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters, as shown in thefollowing figures.

NO TICE






----End



6.4.3.4 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Huawei camera WebUI.

Step 2 Format the SD card.1. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.2. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.

Step 3 Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.


NO TE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the following table.




Condition Result

EncodingProtocol

Resolution FrameRate

I-FrameInterval


SupportedVideoStorageDuration(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6 Mbit/s 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

Step 4 Choose Settings > Intelligent Analysis > Common Intelligence. Select Enable,click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection parameters, and clickSave.

Step 5 Set the deployment policy.


Step 6 Set the alarm linkage policy.




----End

6.4.4 Commissioning a Camera (LAN Switch NetworkingScenario)

6.4.4.1 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera

Prerequisites

If multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera anddisconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connectedcamera, commission other cameras in the same way.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network

segment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in theaddress bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.

NO TE

The following lists the operating system and browser supported for logging in to thecamera through the WebUI.

– Windows 7: Internet Explorer 8/9/10/11, Chrome 32+, and Firefox 35–51

– Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 32+, and Firefox 35–51

– Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 32+, and Firefox 35–51

– Google Chrome 45 or later versions need to install the Internet Explorer tab plug-in.

– Only 32-bit web browsers are supported.

2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, andclick Log In.



NO TE

You need to set Internet Explorer before accessing the camera WebUI for the first time.

Table 6-22 Internet Explorer browser settings

Settings Action



LAN.5. Click OK.





5. Set Automatic prompting forActiveX controls to Enable, andset Download unsigned ActiveXcontrols and Initialize andscript ActiveX controls notmarked as safe for scripting toPrompt.

6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTEYou must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2when the Hypertext Transfer ProtocolSecure (HTTPS) protocol is used toaccess the IPC. Otherwise the cameraweb interface cannot be accessed.


2. Click the Advanced tab.3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS 1.2.4. Click OK.



Settings Action





6. Click OK.


videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.2. Choose Settings > Network > TCP/IP, and set IPv4 address, IPv4 Subnet

mask, and IPv4 Gateway address for the camera according to the site plan.3. Choose Settings > Video/Audio/Image > Video, and set camera stream

type, primary stream, and secondary stream 1 parameters, as shown in thefollowing figures.

NO TICE






----End

Follow-up Procedure

Commission the other cameras by referring to this section.



6.4.4.2 Commissioning an IPC6325 Camera (SD Card Configured)


Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Huawei IPC WebUI.1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network


2. Enter the preset user name admin and the preset password HuaWei123, andclick Log In.


videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.2. Set IPv4 address, IPv4 subnet mask, and IPv4 gateway address to the

planned values.

Figure 6-35 Basic camera configuration

3. Format the SD card.

a. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.b. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.

4. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.




NO TE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the followingtable.


Condition Result

EncodingProtocol

Resolution

FrameRate

I-FrameInterval


Supported VideoStorageDuration(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1M 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1M 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8M 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1M 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6M 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8M 75

5. Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detection

parameters, and click Save.




6. Set the deployment policy.


7. Set the alarm linkage policy.


----End

6.4.4.3 Commissioning a C3220 Camera

PrerequisitesIf multiple cameras are accessed, retain the connection of one camera anddisconnect connections from other cameras. After commissioning the connectedcamera, commission other cameras in the same way.



Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the camera WebUI.1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same network


NO TE

The following lists the requirements for the operating system and browser of thecamera WebUI:– Supports Windows 7: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51– Supports Windows 8: Internet Explorer 10/11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51– Supports Windows 10: Internet Explorer 11, Chrome 38+, FireFox 35–51– The Internet Explorer tab plugin needs to be installed for Google Chrome 45 and

later versions.– Only 32-bit browsers are supported.

2. Set the password as prompted upon the first login. Then use the newpassword to log in.

NO TE

– To prevent security risks, the system prompts you to set the password of the adminuser when you log in to the system for the first time.

– If you enter incorrect passwords for five consecutive times, the account will belocked for 5 minutes by default.

– To prevent security risks, periodically log in to the system as the admin user, clickthe drop-down list in the upper right corner, and click Change Password to changethe administrator password.

– You need to set Internet Explorer before accessing the camera WebUI for the firsttime.


Settings Procedure



LAN.5. Click OK.



Settings Procedure





5. Set Automatic prompting forActiveX controls to Enable, andset Download unsigned ActiveXcontrols and Initialize and scriptActiveX controls not marked assafe for scripting to Prompt.

6. Click OK.

Enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2. NOTEYou must enable TLS 1.1 or TLS 1.2when the HTTPS protocol is used toaccess the camera. Otherwise, thecamera WebUI cannot be opened.


2. Click the Advanced tab.3. Select Use TLS 1.1 or Use TLS

1.2.4. Click OK.





6. Click OK.



Step 2 Commission cameras and set parameters for them. For details, see the delivereddocuments.1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage through

videos. Adjust the lens if necessary.2. On the View tab page, click the Network/Time tab to access the Network/

Time tab page.

Figure 6-40 Setting the IP address

Table 6-25 IP address parameters

Parameter Description

IPv4 addressassignment

Method for obtaining the IP address. The options areObtain IP address automatically and Use thefollowing IP address. The default value is Obtain IPaddress automatically.

IPv4 address Camera IP address. This parameter is available onlywhen IPv4 address assignment is set to Use thefollowing IP address.Enter the planned IP address, for example,192.168.1.161. IP addresses starting with 127 areinvalid. You must enter an IP address starting with avalue that ranges from 1 to 223.

IPv4 gateway Gateway IP address of the network where the camera islocated. The default value is 192.168.0.1.

IPv4 subnetmask

Subnet mask of the network where the camera islocated. The default value is 255.255.255.0.

Primary DNS Primary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.

Secondary DNS Secondary DNS IP address. The default value is 0.0.0.0.



3. On the View tab page, click the General tab to access the General tab page.

Select Video and set the parameters, as shown in the following figures.





Table 6-26 Video stream parameters


Primary stream/Secondarystream

Set the stream type based on the site requirements.– Primary stream: The primary streams feature high

bit rate, definition, and bandwidth usage. They areapplicable to local storage.

– Secondary stream: The secondary streams providesmooth video, occupy small bandwidth, and areapplicable to data transmission over low-bandwidthnetworks.

NOTESD card recording supports only primary streams.

Intelligentencoding

After intelligent encoding is enabled, a camera canautomatically adapt to scenarios to reduce the bit rateand save the storage space.A higher intelligent encoding level indicates moresignificant reduction of the bit rate, which however maylead to image quality deterioration.

Slice This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to H.264.Multi-slice encoding indicates that video streams aredivided into multiple segments. Each segment forms aslice. The encoding process of each slice is independentof each other. Therefore, the camera can encode anddecode multiple slices in parallel, improving encodingand decoding performance. This parameter is selectedby default.

Encodingprotocol

Set the coding protocol based on the site requirements.The options are as follows:– H.264: The H.264 protocol requires relatively small

bandwidth to ensure video quality.– MJPEG: The MJPEG protocol decodes and displays

each frame independently without referring to theprevious and next frames. This protocol has a smallcompression ratio and requires large bandwidth toensure video quality. This protocol is suitable forvideo editing.

– H.265: The H.265 protocol is bandwidth-conservingcompared with the H.264 protocol.

Encodingcomplexity

The options of H.264 profiles include Base profile, Mainprofile, and High profile. Among these profiles, thebaseline profile has the lowest encoding compressionperformance and lowest requirements on hardwaredecoding performance, while the high profile has thehighest.




Resolution A higher resolution indicates clearer images and higherbandwidth consumption.

Bit rate type This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to H.264 or H.265.The bit rate is measured by data bits transmitted in aunit of time.– Variable bit rate: The bit rate varies depending on

the image complexity to ensure the clarity of imageswith great dynamic changes. The bit rate is low if theimage is simple or static. The variable bit rate isrecommended.

– Constant bit rate: The constant bit rate remains thesame. The upper limit of the instantaneous bit rate isset to 110%. If the bit rate is incorrectly configuredfor images with great dynamic changes, the imageswill be unclear.

Max. bit rate This parameter is available only when you set Bit ratetype to Variable bit rate.The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate value Average bit rate when Bit rate type is set to Constantbit rate.The bit rate range depends on the selected resolution.

Bit rate controlmode

This parameter is available only when you set Bit ratetype to Constant bit rate. The options are as follows:– Frame rate priority: Ensure the smoothness of the

video image.– Image quality priority: Ensure the quality of the

video image.

Frame rate The frame rate is measured by the number of framesdisplayed in a second.A higher frame rate indicates clearer and smootherimages and higher bandwidth consumption.

Image quality This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to H.264 or H.265 and Bit rate type toVariable bit rate.Better image quality requires higher bandwidth.Therefore, select proper image quality based on the siterequirements.




I-frame interval This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to H.264 or H.265.An I frame is an intra-coded frame that represents afixed image independent of other picture types. Eachgroup of pictures (GOP) begins with this type of frame.A smaller I-frame interval indicates better video qualityand higher bandwidth consumption.

Layeredencoding

This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to H.264 or H.265.To enable layered encoding, select Layered encoding.

JPEG quality This parameter is available only when you set Encodingprotocol to MJPEG.A larger value indicates higher image quality.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Commission other cameras by referring to this section.

6.4.4.4 Commissioning a C3220 Camera (SD Card Configured)

Context

If the VCN or IVS1800 is not configured and an SD card is chosen, perform thefollowing procedure.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the Huawei camera WebUI.

1. Configure the PC IP address and the camera IP address in the same networksegment. Enter the camera IP address (192.168.0.120 by default) in theaddress bar of the Internet Explorer and press Enter.

2. Set the password as prompted upon the first login. Then use the newpassword to log in.

Step 2 For details about how to commission the camera and set parameters, see thedocuments delivered with the device or the documents obtained by referring tothe "Preparing Documentation" section.

1. Preview the site situation in real time and check the camera coverage throughvideos. Adjust the lens if necessary.

2. Set IPv4 address, IPv4 subnet mask, and IPv4 gateway address to theplanned values.



Figure 6-43 Setting the IP address of the camera

3. Format the SD card.

a. Choose Settings > System Configuration > Storage Management.b. The Storage Management page is displayed. Format the SD card.

4. Set the camera stream type and primary stream parameters. Path: Settings >Video/Audio/Image > Video Settings.




NO TE

If longer-time video storage is required, set camera parameters according to the followingtable.


Condition Result

EncodingProtocol

Resolution

FrameRate

I-FrameInterval


Supported VideoStorageDuration(h)

H.265 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.264 1080P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

H.264 720P 25 50 1 Mbit/s 66

H.265 720P 25 50 0.6 Mbit/s 105

H.264 720P 25 50 0.8 Mbit/s 75

5. Choose Settings > Intelligent Analysis > Common Intelligence. Select

Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detectionparameters, and click Save.

6. Set the deployment policy.


7. Set the alarm linkage policy.




----End

6.4.5 Initializing VCN510 Disks

ContextWhen the VCN510 is delivered to the site, recording data can be stored only afteryou install and initialize the disks.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN.

Step 2 Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.

Step 3 In the upper-right corner of the RAID Groups area, click Initial disk.

Figure 6-47 Initializing disks

Step 4 Choose whether to create a RAID group. To set disks as a RAID group, selectRAID1. To set disks to work independently, select NON-RAID.

NO TE

The VCN510 supports only RAID1 or NON-RAID. If only one disk is configured, the VCN510supports only NON-RAID. This section assumes that two disks are configured for theVCN510.



Table 6-28 Disk modes

RAID Mode Description

RAID1 Two disks are required in RAID 1 mode. If RAID 1 is used,disks back up each other. After recording data is stored in adisk, the data will be simultaneously backed up to anotherdisk, ensuring high data storage reliability. However, thedisk usage of RAID 1 is lower than that of disks that workindependently.

NON-RAID If disks work independently, recording data is stored intotwo disks in sequence, ensuring high disk usage. However,the data storage reliability of disks that work independentlyis lower than that of RAID 1.

Step 5 Click Start. A risk warning is displayed.

Step 6 Click OK. The system starts to initialize the disks.

NO TE

The server will be restarted during the initialization of disks. The process takes about 5 to10 minutes.

----End

Verification

Step 1 Choose Local Configuration > Local Disk.

Step 2 View the RAID group status in the RAID Groups area.

If RAID1 is selected for the disks, RAID 1 is created for both the system partition(used to store system data) and data partition (used to store recordings).

Figure 6-48 RAID group status of RAID 1

When two disks are configured, if NON-RAID is selected for the disks, RAID 1 iscreated for the system partition.



Figure 6-49 RAID group status of disks that work independently (two disks)

If only one disk is configured, RAID 0 is created for the system partition after disksare initialized.

Figure 6-50 RAID group status of disks that work independently (one disk)

NO TE

● After a RAID 1 is created for the system partition, the system partition's RAID group is indata restoration state. At this time, one disk is synchronizing data in the systempartition to the system partition of another disk. The synchronization process takesabout 20 hours, which does not impact services. During this process, do not remove andinsert disks.

● If the OMU portal stays at the Local Disk tab page, even if users do not perform anyoperation for a long period of time, the OMU portal will not automatically return to thelogin page. For service security reasons, if users do not perform any operation for a longperiod of time, the OMU portal will return to the login page or does not stay at theLocal Disk tab page.

----End

6.4.6 Setting Parameters on the VCN WebUI

Prerequisites

For details about the VCN hardware description and installation, see the"Hardware Guide" in the corresponding VCN product documentation. For detailsabout the VCN configuration, see Configuration Guide.

NO TE

The version number is subject to the Quick Start delivered with the VCN. The descriptionand link in this document are for reference only.



Context

A default IP address has been configured for the VCN before delivery. Modify theIP address based on the actual network plan.

Procedure

Step 1 Modify the IP address for the VCN.

1. Configure the PC IP address and the VCN IP address in the same networksegment. Enter the OMU Portal address (the default address for VCN500 ishttps://192.168.1.100:8443; the default address for VCN510&VCN520&VCN540is https://192.168.2.101:8443) in the address bar of the Internet Explorer andpress the Enter button.

NO TE

The OMU Portal supports Internet Explorer 8.0 and later versions.

2. On the login page, enter the user name admin and preset passwordChange_Me, and click Log In to enter the OMU Portal page. A message isdisplayed upon the first login indicating that you should modify the password.After modifying the password, keep it properly.

NO TE

– If the VCN software version is V100R003 or later, the default user name is admin.

– If the VCN software version is V100R002 or earlier, the default user name isAdmin.

– The following uses V100R003 as an example.

3. Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration. Set the service IPaddress (internal IP address of the VCN), time zone, and time according tothe site requirements.

Figure 6-51 Configuring the server

NO TE

Set Business IP to XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX, Subnet mask to 255.255.255.0, and Gateway IPto XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX. The values here are examples. The actual value prevails.

4. (Optional) Configure the NTP synchronization. After setting The NTP clocksource server to Yes, set the IP address of the NTP server.



NO TE

Currently, the VCN and NTP source server must be in the same LAN for NTPsynchronization. For details, see Step 2.

If the VCN and the NTP source server are not in the same LAN, you need to manuallyset the time as follows: Choose Local Configuration > Server configuration andchange Timezone config and Time config based on the time of the source server tobe synchronized.

5. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration, set Module name to MU,and click Search.

6. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Nameis NatIP and set Value to the external IP address of the VCN. Click Save.

Figure 6-52 Setting the external IP address of the MU

NO TE

Set NatIP to the external IP address of the VCN, which is the same as the external IPaddress mapped by the VCN on the ECC800-Pro.

7. Set Module name to OMU and click Search.8. In the search result, click Edit in the row where the value of Parameter Name

is OMUNatIP and set Value to the NATIP address of the MU. Click Save.

Figure 6-53 Setting the external IP address of the OMU

Step 2 Enable camera NTP synchronization.

The camera NTP synchronization function for the server is disabled by default. Thecamera NTP synchronization function needs to be enabled for the server thatconnects to the camera. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled,cameras will automatically time-synchronize from their access servers.

1. Log in to the OMU portal of the VCN as user admin.



2. Choose Maintenance > Unified Configuration.

3. Select the server that the camera needs to access, set Module name to SCUand Parameter type to System property, and click Search.

Figure 6-54 Configuring camera NTP synchronization

4. In the search results, click Edit in the row where Parameter Name is NTPIPCand set Value to 1.

5. Click Save. After the camera NTP synchronization function is enabled, thecamera, after being connected to the server, will automatically time-synchronize with the server.

----End

Follow-up Procedure● The VCN automatically restarts after the IP address is modified. The restart

takes about 5 minutes. After the restart, use the new IP address to access theVCN.

● Change the PC IP address to an address in the network segment of the newVCN IP address, enter the VCN IP address in the address box of the Internetbrowser, and log in to the OMU Portal system.

● (Optional) Set up a VCN stack. For details, log in to the https://e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open thedocumentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying IVS in StackMode.

● (Optional) Create a VCN cluster. For details, log in to the https://e.huawei.com/, search for the VCN product documentation, open thedocumentation, and see the section (Optional) Deploying MPUs in ClusterMode.

NO TE

For the VCN500, search for VCN500 Product Documentation. For theVCN510&VCN520&VCN540, search for VCN510&VCN520&VCN540 ProductDocumentation.

6.4.7 Setting Parameters on the VCN IVS Client

Prerequisites

The network communication between the VCN and the camera is normal.



Procedure

Step 1 Install the VCN IVS client.

1. Download the VCN IVS client.

You can obtain the VCN IVS in either of the following ways:

Method 1: Obtain the HW_IVS_Client.exe file from the software CD-ROMdelivered with the VCN.

Method 2 1. Log in to the VCN OMU Portal, choose Local Configuration >Basic Configuration, and view Current version.

2. Log in to https://support.huawei.com/enterprise/, and searchfor Client Package.zip followed by the VCN model (ClientPackage.zip VCN540 for example). In the search result, clickthe Software Download tab, click the version and patchnumber corresponding to the current version, and downloadthe Client Package.zip software package.

Figure 6-55 Client Package search result

2. Right-click HW_IVS_Client.exe and choose Run as administrator from theshortcut menu. Use the default installation mode until the installation iscomplete.

3. Right-click the client program and choose Run as administrator from theshortcut menu. The login page is displayed, enter the user name admin andpreset password Change_Me, and set Server address to the actual service IPaddress (VCN IP address) and Port to 9900.

NO TE

If the VCN IVS and VCN are deployed in the same LAN, set Server IP address to theVCN internal IP address (192.168.248.55, for example). If the VCN IVS is on anextranet and the VCN is on a LAN, set Server IP address to the VCN external IPaddress.

4. Click Log In to access the client home page. A message is displayed upon thefirst login indicating that you should modify the password. After modifyingthe password, keep it properly.

Step 2 Add a camera. For details, see the documentation delivered with the equipment orobtain the documentation by referring to the "Preparing Documentation" section.View the corresponding section.

NO TE

The driver protocol of IPC6325 and C3220 cameras is HWSDK.

1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click AddCamera.



2. Click + in the lower left corner on the Search criteria page, setting theparameters according to the following table, and click Next.

Table 6-29 Setting search criteria

Item Value

Start IP Address and End IP Address IP address range

Drive HWSDK

Access domain Select the domain that camerasneed to access

Mount server Select the server that cameras needto access

NO TE

If there are multiple VCNs for multiple smart modules, you are advised to evenly distributethe cameras to each VCN.

3. Click Search, in each camera record, enter the user name and password in thetext boxes and click Verify. If the camera is verified successfully, selectcameras to add and click Next.

4. Preview live video images, click the camera in the camera list on the left, andadjust camera parameters to optimize the image effect. Then click Next.

5. (Optional) Group the cameras and click Next after grouping.6. Click Finish to finish adding a camera.

Step 3 Configure a video recording plan.1. In the Quick Setup area on the VCN IVS home page, double-click Server

Recording Plan.2. Select the camera on the Cameras list and click Next.3. (Optional) Set recording parameters, and click Next.4. Set recording plan parameters in the Time settings. Drag the timeline to

select the time segment for implementing video recording.

NO TE

If you set the recording plan policy is to All, you do not need to set the recording plantime.

5. Click Next to complete the recording plan setting. When is displayed in thestatus bar, the recording plan has been set successfully.

6. Click Finish.

Step 4 Create a user.

When connecting to the VCN on the NetEco, you need to log in to the VCN as anon-admin user.

1. Log in to the VCN IVS as user admin.



2. On the VCN IVS home page, double-click Add User, create a user, and clickNext. The Assign Rights page is displayed.

NO TE

When creating a user, you can select Enable account validity period and set Valid fromand Valid to to set the account validity period for the created user.

Figure 6-56 Creating a user

3. Set Multi-point logins to a value greater than 2.4. In the Assign Device View Rights area, select the cameras to be browsed and

queried by the user. Set other parameters based on the documentationdelivered with the equipment or the documentation obtained by referring tothe Preparing Documentation section, and click Finish.

----End

6.5 Linkage Control

6.5.1 FusionModule2000 Linkage Control

Prerequisites● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name

and password used for WebUI login.● A PC with an IP address in the same network segment as that of the ECC800-

Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN1 on the ECC800-Pro.● Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.



Linkage Grouping

Table 6-30 FusionModule2000 linkage grouping

Linkage Category Default Status Function

● Link smoke alarmwith skylight open

● Open door/turn onlights if smokealarm a

on If a smoke alarm is raised, thesmart module opens the skylightsand door and turns on lights bydefault.

Link smoke alarm withair conditioner off

off If this linkage status is set to onand a smoke alarm is raised, thesmart cooling products shut downautomatically.

Intelligent lighting a off If this linkage status is set to onand an infrared alarm is raisedwhen the camera detects humanmotion or the door is opened asauthorized, the aisle lights turn onautomatically.

● Link fire control withskylight open

● Open door/turn onlights by fire linkagea

● Link fire control withair conditioner off

off If this linkage status is set to onand a fire occurs in the smartmodule, the skylights open, lightsturn on, and the door opensautomatically, or the smart coolingproducts shut down automatically.

Link high temperaturewith skylight open

off If this linkage status is set to on,the skylights open automaticallywhen a high temperature alarm israised and all smart coolingproducts fail to communicate withthe ECC800-Pro.

High-density islandopen lock if hightemperature

off If this linkage status is set to onand High-density island solutionis set to Yes, the cabinet electroniclock is automatically unlockedwhen the average temperature ofthe cold aisle is greater than 30°C.

High-density islandopen lock if smokealarm

off If this linkage status is set to onand High-density island solutionis set to Yes, the cabinet electroniclock is automatically unlockedwhen an AI/DI_1 smoke alarm isgenerated.



Linkage Category Default Status Function

a: To link Open door/turn on lights if smoke alarm, Intelligent lighting, andOpen door/turn on lights by fire linkage, set Set light mode to Automatic onthe WebUI. Path: Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group > AC Actuator, clickRunning Parameters.NOTE

When the FusionModule Actuator is configured, you need to set parameters for theactuator. The setting process is similar.

6.5.1.1 Fire Control Linkage

Context● The ECC800-Pro can generate an alarm using the multi-functional sensor or

smoke sensor in the aisle. This alarm, however, cannot be used to trigger thecustomer's fire extinguishing system.

● A passive dry contact alarm signal of the customer's fire extinguishing systemcan be used to achieve the following purposes: (1) Open the skylight usingthe ECC800-Pro AI/DI port, so that the fire extinguishing system in thecustomer's equipment room can quickly function in the aisle. (2) Enable theaisle access control system and turn on the lighting to facilitate escape. (3)Shut down the smart cooling product and prevent the smart cooling productfrom supplying air to increase the fire.

NO TE

An active dry contact signal of the customer's fire extinguishing system cannot beconnected to the ECC800-Pro AI/DI port.

● The default status of fire control linkage is off. Set it based on the actualsituation.

● Shutting down the smart cooling product by fire linkage is used as anexample. Refer to this section for details about opening the skylight,unlocking the aisle access control, and turning on the lighting system by firelinkage.

● In this example, the fire controller connects to port AI/DI_3. The actual portprevails.

Procedure

Step 1 Install cables between the fire controller and ECC800-Pro.



Figure 6-57 Installing cables between the fire controller and ECC800-Pro


Step 3 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control.

Step 4 Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.

Step 5 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link fire control with air conditioner off toon.

NO TE

Select Link fire control with air conditioner off under Linkage Group. If its value is on, thecorresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off, thecorresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 6 Modify the AI/DI_3 signal name.


2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch SignalConfiguration page is displayed.

3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.

4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Fire andclick Submit.

Step 7 Enable the AI/DI device.


2. Set Fire sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_3 setting page.

3. Select Fire sensor type and set it to Normal Open or Normal Close asrequired.

NO TE

After the corresponding AI/DI device is enabled, the AI/DI device type must beconsistent with the DO state.



Table 6-31 Fire sensor NO and NC definitions

Item Definition

NO Dry contact signal for the fire sensorabnormality alarm. Closed: alarm;open: normal

NC Dry contact signal for the fire sensorabnormality alarm. Closed: normal;open: alarm

4. Click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the alarm has been cleared when fire control linkage or smoke alarmlinkage occurs, perform the following operations:

● Close the skylight manually.● Start the smart cooling products manually.● After turning off the lights, set Set light mode of the AC actuator to

Automatic. WebUI path: Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group > ACActuator > Running Parameters.

NO TE

When a smart module actuator is configured, you need to set parameters for thesmart module actuator. The setting process is similar.

6.5.1.2 High Temperature Linkage

Context● The ECC800-Pro implements high temperature linkage. If it detects high

temperature alarms by interacting with multi-functional sensors and all smartcooling products fail to communicate with the ECC800-Pro, the ECC800-Proopens skylights based on the alarm status to facilitate heat dissipation.

● The default status of high temperature linkage is off. Set it based on theactual situation.

Procedure




Step 4 Ensure that Link high temperature with skylight open is in on state on theLinkage Group tab page.



NO TE

Click Link high temperature with skylight open on the Linkage Group tab page. If it is in onstate, the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page are available. Ifit is in off state, the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page areunavailable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the alarm is cleared in high temperature linkage, close the skylightsmanually.

6.5.1.3 (Optional) Commissioning an Intelligent Aisle Light

Prerequisites

The upstream power input circuit breaker of the AC actuator is turned on.

Context

After the intelligent aisle lighting is set successfully, perform the following steps:

● After the door is opened using the access control system, the lighting isturned on.

NO TE

An access control system is involved in the scenario.

● In the smart module aisle, the lighting is turned on when a camera and amulti-functional sensor detect that someone enters.

● The lighting is turned off when the camera and the multi-functional sensorfail to detect any person in the aisle within 10 minutes.

NO TE

When using the intelligent lighting function, pay attention to the following:

● If a foreign object is hung on the skylight ceiling of the smart module and when the foreignobject moves, the camera may mistakenly generate a motion detection alarm to change thelighting status.

● When the human body moves, the camera generates a motion detection alarm and thelighting is turned on. If the motion amplitude of the human body is small, the cameracannot generate the motion detection alarm. If the lighting is turned off due to this reason,wave to the camera and the lighting is turned on again.

● If light greatly changes outside the smart module, the camera may mistakenly generate amotion detection alarm and the lighting is mistakenly turned on.

● If you manually turn off the lighting when you leave the smart module, the lighting will beturned on again when the camera detects that the person leaves.

● The effective detection distance of the multi-functional sensor is 2.5 m.

Procedure






Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Intelligent lighting to on.

Step 5 Check and configure the wireless networking (802.15.4) function of the ACactuator.

Before networking, ensure that the ECC800-Pro and AC actuator do not havenetwork parameters. That is, the RF_Z indicator on the ECC800-Pro blinks green atsuper short intervals, and the RF_Z indicator on the AC actuator is steady green.

● If the RF_Z indicator on the ECC800-Pro does not blink green at super shortintervals, press and hold the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for 3 to 5 secondsto enter the wireless network (802.15.4) pairing state.

● If the RF_Z indicator on the AC actuator is not steady green, hold down theBLINK button on the AC actuator for more than 10 seconds to make the ACactuator enter non-networking status.

1. Hold down the BLINK button on the AC actuator for 2 seconds (1–5 secondsallowed). The RF_Z indicator on the AC actuator turns from steady green toblinking green intermittently at super short intervals (blinking at super shortintervals for 0.5 seconds and then off for 0.5 seconds). The component entersthe wireless network search status.

2. After the wireless networking (802.15.4) pairing succeeds, the RF_Z indicatoron the AC actuator starts to blink at long intervals.

3. After all AC actuators are networked, hold down the SW button on theECC800-Pro main control module for 3–5 seconds. The RF_Z indicator on theECC800-Pro main control modules turns from blinking green at super shortintervals to blinking green at long intervals (blinking at 0.5 Hz, on for 1second and then off for 1 second). The ECC800-Pro exits the wirelessnetworking (802.15.4) pairing status.

NO TE

If two or more ECC800-Pro controllers need to be networked in wireless (802.15.4) mode,only one system can be networked at one time. During the networking, ensure that theRF_Z indicators on the ECC800-Pro main control modules of other systems are blinking atlong intervals.

Step 6 Set running parameters for the AC actuator.

Table 6-32 Setting AC actuator parameters

Path Operation

Monitoring > Aisle > AC ActuatorGroup > AC Actuator > RunningParameters

Set Route 1 Control Mode to Light,and click Submit.

Set Route 2 Control Mode to PADCharging, and click Submit.NOTE

If two AC actuators are configured, youonly need to set the Route 2 ControlMode for one AC actuator.



NO TE

When the FusionModule Actuator is configured, you need to set parameters for theactuator. The setting process and parameters are similar.

Step 7 Check the functions of the AC actuator.



Path: Monitoring > Aisle > AC Actuator Group >AC Actuator1. Choose Running Parameters, and set Set

light mode is Manual.2. Choose Controls, select Light control, select

ON, and click Submit.

The light is on.

When the light is normal, set Set light mode to Automatic. Path: Monitoring >Aisle > AC Actuator Group > AC Actuator, click Running Parameters.

Step 8 Set camera parameters.

NO TE

● If the camera is connected to the smart ETH gateway, you need to set cameraparameters for intelligent lighting linkage.

● The camera checks whether there are people motions in the aisle and an infrared alarmis generated. If so, the AC actuator turns on the lights.

● If the IP address of the camera that is automatically connected is the same as the IPaddress of the camera that is manually added, the information about the camera that ismanually added is overwritten.

1. Select the actual camera type and go to the camera web page. For details, seethe section about camera commissioning.

2. Choose Settings > Network > Platform Connection > Second ProtocolParameters. On the ONVIF and GENETEC tab pages, set platforminterconnection parameters.

Figure 6-58 Setting platform connection parameters ONVIF



Figure 6-59 Setting platform connection parameters GENETEC

3. Choose Settings > Intelligent > Common Intelligence > Motion Detection> Area Parameters.

4. Select Enable, click Add, add motion detection areas, set motion detectionparameters, and click Save.


5. If there are multiple cameras, repeat Step 8.1–Step 8.3.

----End

6.5.1.4 Setting Link Smoke Alarm with Skylight Open

Prerequisites● This section uses the skylight button connecting to the AI/DI_1 port on the

ECC800-Pro as an example.● A smoke sensor has been connected to the skylight actuator, or a multi-

functional sensor has been connected to the smart ETH gateway.

Context● If a skylight button is configured, follow the instructions provided in this

section to link the smoke alarm with skylight open.● The ECC800-Pro supports skylight linkage. When the skylight button is

manually pressed or the smoke sensor detects smoke, a smoke alarm is raisedand the skylight is opened.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters.

Step 3 Click AI/DI_1 Port Settings, set AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, and click Submit.

Step 4 Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Normal open or Normal close and click Submit.

NO TE

If a skylight button is connected, perform Step 3 and Step 4.

Step 5 Choose Monitoring > Aisle > Skylight Actuator Group > Skylight Actuator 1 >Running Parameters > DI1 alarm level.

NO TE

When a smart module actuator is configured, you need to set parameters for the smartmodule actuator. The setting process is similar.

Step 6 Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm or High voltage alarm, and clickSubmit.

NO TE

● Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected over NO.● Set DI1 alarm level to High voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected over NC.



Step 9 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link smoke alarm with skylight open toon.

Step 10 Add a logic program.

NO TE

If a skylight button is connected, perform this step.

1. On the Linkage Group tab page, click the Link smoke alarm with skylightopen entry.

2. On the Linkage Logic List tab page, click Add.3. Set parameters for the Link smoke alarm with skylight open.

Figure 6-61 Link smoke alarm with skylight open logic

4. Click Submit.



Step 11 Ensure that Link smoke alarm with skylight open on the Linkage Group tabpage is on.

NO TE

Click Link smoke alarm with skylight open on the Linkage Group tab page. If it is in on state,the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page are available. If it isin off state, the corresponding logic configurations on the Linkage Logic List tab page areunavailable.

Step 12 Check the Link smoke alarm with skylight open linkage function.


Check Method Expected Result

When the skylight in the aisle isclosed, press the skylight button toopen the skylight.

● Smoke DI alarm is displayed onthe active alarm page of the app orWebUI.

● The skylight is opened.Simulate a smoky environment underthe smoke sensor or the multi-funcsensor.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureAfter Link smoke alarm with skylight open linkage is triggered and the alarm iscleared, perform the following operations:

● Press the reset button on the smoke sensor to clear the alarm.● Close the skylight manually.

6.5.2 FusionModule800 Linkage Control

Prerequisites● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name


Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN1 on the ECC800-Pro.● Ensure that Enable linkage control function is Yes.



Linkage Grouping

Table 6-35 FusionModule800 linkage grouping

LinkageCategory

DefaultStatus

Function

Link airconditionerfault withemergencyfan

off If this linkage status is set to on:If all smart cooling products fail to communicate, andthe aisle temperature is higher than 27°C, theemergency fan starts.If all smart cooling products fail to provide the coolingfunction properly, and the aisle temperature is higherthan 27°C, the emergency fan starts.

LinkemergencyventilationwithCabinetElectronicClasp lockopen

off If this linkage status is set to on:● If all smart cooling products communicate properly

but do not provide the cooling function, and thetemperature in the cold aisle is greater than orequal to the preset value (30°C by default), therear door of the IT cabinet automatically opens.

● If all smart cooling products fail to communicate,and the temperature in the cold aisle is greaterthan or equal to the preset value (30°C by default),the rear door of the IT cabinet automatically opens.

● If the rear door of the IT cabinet is open and thetemperature in the cold aisle is higher than thepreset value (35°C by default), the front door ofthe IT cabinet automatically opens.

● If at least one smart cooling product is in coolingmode or the temperature in the cold aisle is lowerthan the preset temperature (30°C by default)minus 2°C, the ECC800-Pro reports a critical alarmfor door closing to remind the customer to closethe door manually. The alarm is cleared after thedoor is closed.NOTE

● After the IT cabinet door automatically opens, a dooropen alarm is displayed on the active alarms page ofthe ECC800-Pro.

● In the Linkage Group area, click Link emergency

ventilation with lock open. Click to expand the

Linkage Logic List. Click in the Operationcolumn to modify the temperature setting.



LinkageCategory

DefaultStatus

Function

Link smokealarm withCabinetElectronicClasp lockopen

off If this linkage status is set to on:● When a smoke alarm is generated, the rear cabinet

door is opened.● When the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Pro

generates a door open alarm. After the smokealarm is cleared, you need to manually close thedoor. After the door is closed, the door open alarmis cleared.

● If the emergency heat dissipation control logicconflicts with the smoke alarm control logic, thesmoke alarm control logic takes precedence.NOTE

If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside thesmart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

Link firecontrol withCabinetElectronicClasp lockopen

off If this linkage status is set to on:● When a fire alarm (dry contact alarm) is

generated, the rear door of the IT cabinet isopened.

● When the cabinet door is opened, the ECC800-Progenerates a door open alarm. After the fire alarmis cleared, you need to manually close the ITcabinet door. After the door is closed, the dooropen alarm is cleared.

● If the emergency heat dissipation control logicconflicts with the fire linkage control logic, the firelinkage control logic takes precedence.NOTE

If the fire extinguishing system is installed inside thesmart module, the linkage function is not enabled.

6.5.2.1 Link Air Conditioner Fault with Emergency Fan

Context

In this example, the NTC connects to port AI/DI_2. The actual port prevails.

Procedure




Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link air conditioner fault with emergencyfan to on.



NO TE

Select Link air conditioner fault with emergency fan under Linkage Group. If its value is on,the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If its value is off,the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Enable the AI/DI device.1. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2

Port Settings.2. Set AI/DI_2 sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_2 setting

page.3. Select AI/DI_2 sensor type and set it to NTC.4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.

Ensure that I power supply enable(AIDI_2/COM1/AIDI_4/COM3) is Enable.

----End

6.5.2.2 Link Smoke Alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp Lock Open

Context

In this example, the smoke sensor connects to port AI/DI_1. The actual portprevails.

Procedure




Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link smoke alarm with Cabinet ElectronicClasp lock open to on.

NO TE

Select Link smoke alarm with Cabinet Electronic Clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If itsvalue is on, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If itsvalue is off, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_1 signal name.1. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.2. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.3. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Smoke

and click Submit.


Port Settings.2. Set AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_1 setting

page.



3. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensoror Smoke sensor(NC).

4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.Ensure that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Enable.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the smoke alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the door. After thedoor is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

6.5.2.3 Link Fire Control with Lock Open

Context

In this example, the fire controller connects to port AI/DI_2. The actual portprevails.

Procedure




Step 4 On the Linkage Group tab page, set Link fire control with Cabinet ElectronicClasp lock open to on.

NO TE

Select Link fire control with Cabinet Electronic Clasp lock open under Linkage Group. If itsvalue is on, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are available. If itsvalue is off, the corresponding logic configurations under Linkage Logic List are unavailable.

Step 5 Modify the AI/DI_2 signal name.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch Signal

Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device type to ECC800 and Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Fire and

click Submit.


Port Settings.2. Set Fire sensor to Enable. Click Submit to access the AI/DI_2 setting page.3. Select Fire sensor type and set it to Normal Open or Normal Close as

required.4. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.




5. Click Submit.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

After the fire alarm is cleared, you need to manually close the IT cabinet door.After the door is closed, the door open alarm is cleared.

6.6 Infrared Remote Control Module Control andManagement

In the FusionModule500 scenario, the automatic startup function is added for civilsmart cooling products. The infrared remote control module controls the startupof smart cooling products through the monitoring module.

6.6.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the T/H sensor to the COM1 port on the ECC800-Pro using a networkcable.

Step 2 Connect the infrared remote control module to the T/H sensor using a networkcable.

----End

6.6.2 Setting and Adding an Infrared Remote Control Module

Prerequisites● The infrared remote control module is connected to the ECC800-Pro, and both

are powered on.● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name

and password used for WebUI login.● You have prepared a PC with an IP address in the same network segment as

that of the ECC800-Pro, and the PC is connected to the WAN port on theECC800-Pro.

Context

After an infrared remote control module is replaced, you need to add the newinfrared remote control module on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Procedure

Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the infrared remote control module.

1. Set the device address to 2 by setting the DIP switch on the infrared remotecontrol module. Table 6-36 describes how to set the DIP switch.



The DIP switch consists of toggle switches 1–5 (from left to right). Toggleswitches 1–4 specify the address of the infrared remote control module.Toggle switch 5 specifies the address of the RS485 build-out resistor. 0indicates OFF and 1 indicates ON. Toggle switch 5 is set to OFF.



ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

1 ON OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF

NO TE

The address of the infrared remote control module is set to 2 by default.

Step 2 Add the infrared remote control module.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add an infrared remote control module and click Add Device.

Table 6-37 Parameters for adding an infrared remote control module


SystemSettings >DeviceManagement

Device Type Select Infrared remote control modulefrom the drop-down list box.

Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down list box.

Communications Port

Select COM1 from the drop-down list box.NOTE

Connect the T/H sensor to the COM1 port on theECC800-Pro, and cascade the T/H sensor to theinfrared remote control module. If the T/Hsensor is connected to another port, enter thenumber of the connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 2.Set the actual device address of the infraredremote control module during operations.

3. Click Connect Test to check the connectivity between the infrared remote

control module and the ECC800-Pro.

a. If the connection succeeds, click Add Device.b. If the connection fails, check whether the device is properly connected to


----End



6.6.3 Control Function of an Infrared Remote Control Module

Prerequisites● The infrared remote control module is connected to the ECC800-Pro, and both

are powered on.● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name

and password used for WebUI login.● You have prepared a PC with an IP address in the same network segment as

that of the ECC800-Pro, and the PC is connected to the WAN port on theECC800-Pro.

Context● The infrared remote control module supports self-learning and can remotely

control the startup of the civil smart cooling product.● The infrared remote control module can be in infrared learning state and

control code sending state. After power-on, the device is in normal operatingmode by default.

Procedure

Step 1 Set functions of the infrared remote control module on the WebUI.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose System Settings > Linkage Control, set Enable linkage control to

Yes, and click Submit. Set Automatic air conditioner startup to On.3. Choose Monitoring > System > Infrared Remote Control Module.4. On the Controls tab page, choose Learning the startup instruction, and

click Submit.5. Direct the remote control of the smart cooling product to the infrared

receiving place on the infrared remote control module, and press the powerbutton once.

NO TE

If you do not press the button within 20s, the remote control of the smart coolingproduct will exit the learning mode due to a timeout. You can click Learning thestartup instruction on the ECC800-Pro WebUI and start the learning mode again.

6. On the Controls tab page, choose Exiting the learning mode, and clickSubmit.

7. On the Controls tab page, select Air conditioner startup and click Submit.The re-authentication page is displayed. Enter Login Password and clickSubmit.

8. Check whether the smart cooling product is powered on. If yes, the controlfunction is enabled. If no, rectify the faults and perform the operation again.



NO TE

● After you perform Learning the startup instruction on the WebUI, check the indicatorstatus. If the indicator on the infrared remote control module blinks yellow, it indicatesthat the infrared remote control module enters the infrared learning state. If the greenindicator blinks, it indicates learning success of the key code. If the indicator is steadyyellow, it indicates learning failure and you need to rectify the faults and performLearning the startup instruction again.

● After you perform Air conditioner startup on the WebUI, check whether the smartcooling product starts. If it starts, the control function works; if it cannot start, rectifythe fault and perform the preceding steps again.

Step 2 (Optional) Set functions on the infrared remote control module.

1. After the device is powered on, the yellow indicator is steady on, indicatingthat the device has not learned the infrared encoding. The green indicatorblinks, indicating that the device has learned the infrared encoding. Theinfrared remote control module is in normal operating mode by default.

2. Press the SW button on the infrared remote control module for more than 3s.Then the indicator blinks yellow and the infrared remote control moduleenters learning operating mode.

3. Press the SW button once quickly and the infrared remote control moduleenters the waiting state for learning. Direct the remote control of the smartcooling product to the infrared receiving place on the infrared remote controlmodule, and press the power button once. If the green indicator blinks, itindicates learning success of the first key code.

NO TE

The device will quit learning operating mode automatically once finish learning.

4. After the smart cooling product is shut down, direct the infrared remotecontrol module to the smart cooling product and press the SW button once.

5. Check whether the smart cooling product is powered on. If yes, the controlfunction is enabled. If no, rectify the faults and perform the operation again.

----End

6.7 PUE ConfigurationThe PUE configuration mode can be set to Standard and User-defined on theECC800-Pro WebUI. You can enable PUE functions and select a PUE configurationmode based on requirements.

NO TE

If the device electrical energy cannot be collected, disable the PUE function for the scenarioswhere the PUE calculation condition is not met, for example, the smart cooling product ispowered by the wall-mounted PDB.

Feature Description● Supports user-defined settings of the PUE and power consumption on the

ECC800-Pro WebUI.● Synchronizes the PUE and power consumption calculated by the ECC800-Pro

from the WebUI to the app, and displays the data on the app screen.



● The ECC800-Pro connects to the NetEco over a northbound port and canupload the calculated PUE and power consumption data to the NetEco.

PUE Calculation FormulaNO TE

The PUE ranges from 1 to 3. If the PUE value is greater than or equal to 3, the value isdisplayed as 3. When the PUE value is 1, it is invalid.

Table 6-38 PUE calculation formula

ConfigurationMode

PUE Calculation Method

Standard PUE = Increment in total system input electrical energy/Increment in total electrical energy of system IT load output

User-defined PUE = Increment in total active electrical energy of deviceinput/Increment in total energy consumption of IT load output

NOTEWhen the configuration mode is set to Standard, the ECC800-Pro can automaticallycalculate the PUE of multiple devices connected in the N+1 and 2N scenarios.

6.7.1 Configuring PUE Standard Mode

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > PUE Configuration.

Step 3 Set PUE function to Enable.

Step 4 Set PUE configuration mode to Standard, and click Submit.

Step 5 View the PUE. Choose Query > Performance Data and set Device to ECC800from the drop-down list box. For other searching criteria such as Performancedata, Statistics mode, Start time, and End time, select the item based onrequirements and click Query. You can also view the PUE in the dashboard orcurve on the home page.

----End

Example of PUE CalculationIn this example, the PUE is calculated on the basis of the start time 17:00 and endtime 18:00.

1. Choose Query > Performance Data.2. Set Device to ECC800, Performance data to Total system input electrical

energy, and Statistics Mode to Hour, set other query criteria such as Starttime and End Time as required, and click Query. Record the increment in



total system input electrical energy of the ECC800-Pro. Increment in totalsystem input electrical energy = 110.0 kWh – 100.0 kWh = 10.0 kWh.

Figure 6-62 Querying the total system input electrical energy

3. Set Device to ECC800, Performance data to Total electrical energy ofsystem IT load output, and Statistics mode to Hour, set other query criteriasuch as Start time and End time as required, and click Query. Record theincrement in total electrical energy of system IT load output of the ECC800-Pro. Increment in total electrical energy of system IT load output = 56.0 kWh– 50.0 kWh = 6.0 kWh.

Figure 6-63 Querying the total electrical energy of system IT load output

4. Calculate the PUE of the smart module. PUE = Increment in total system inputelectrical energy/Increment in total electrical energy of system IT load output= 10.0 kWh/6.0 kWh = 1.67.

6.7.2 Configuring PUE User-defined Mode

Context

This section describes how to configure PUE for the integrated PDU connected.

The functions of configuration buttons for the PUE user-defined mode aredescribed as follows.

Table 6-39 PUE configuration buttons

No. Button Description

1 Add Adds new total power consumption or IT power consumptionparameters.

2 Delete Deletes a parameter setting for the total power consumptionor IT power consumption.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > PUE Configuration.

Step 3 Set PUE function to Enable.

Step 4 Set PUE configuration mode to User-defined, and click Submit.

1. On the Total Power Consumption Configuration tab page, click Add toenter the Total Power Consumption Configuration page. On the SelectDevice tab page, select Integrated PDU 1. On the Select Indicators tabpage, select Total active electricity energy of PDU input, and click Confirm.

Figure 6-64 Total power consumption configuration

2. On the IT Cabinet Power Consumption Configuration tab page, click Add toenter the IT Cabinet Power Consumption Configuration page. On theSelect Device tab page, select Integrated PDU 1 and on the SelectIndicators tab page, select 1QF4 electricity energy, 1QF5 electricity energy,and 1QF6 electricity energy, and click Confirm.

Figure 6-65 IT cabinet power consumption configuration

3. Under Total Power Consumption Configuration and IT Cabinet PowerConsumption Configuration, click the edit icon on the right to modify themultiple for calculating indicators, as shown in Figure 6-66.



Figure 6-66 Editing a multiple

NO TE

● The multiple ranges from 0.01 to 4.99, with two significant digits. The default value is1.00.

● The multiple is configured for slightly adjusting the calculated PUE, ensuring that thecalculated PUE is as close as possible to the actual PUE.

Step 5 Calculate the PUE of the smart module. PUE = Increment in total system inputelectrical energy/Increment in total electrical energy of system IT load output

NO TE

Performance data source: The ECC800-Pro obtains total electricity energy of branches fromthe power distribution devices.

Step 6 You can also view the PUE in the dashboard or PUE Chart on the home page.

----End

6.7.3 Viewing PUE

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View to view real-time PUE.

Figure 6-67 Viewing real-time PUE

Step 3 Choose Query > Performance Data to view historical PUE data.1. Choose Device, Performance data, Start time, End time, and the display

mode (table or curve) of the PUE parameter as required.2. Click Query.

NO TE

– The 17:00:00 data includes the data from 17:00:00 to 18:00:00.– If the query time is between 18:00:00 and 19:00:00 and the time has not arrived at

19:00:00 yet, then the displayed time is 18:00:00 and the data includes the datafrom 18:00:00 to the query time.



Figure 6-68 Viewing historical PUE data

----End

6.8 Battery ManagementIf iBOXs and iBATs are configured, perform the following steps to commissionthem.

6.8.1 Setting iBOX and iBAT Parameters

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > iBOX > Running Parameters.

Step 3 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, set iBOX single battery qty., Batt.installation time, Single battery capacity, Current source, and Battery stringNo.. Retain default values for other parameters.

Table 6-40 Setting iBOX parameters

Parameter Description Remarks

iBOX singlebattery qty.

Total number of batteriesmonitored by the iBOX

Set this parameterbased on the batteryparameter planned bythe customer.

Batt installationtime

Actual time at which batteries areinstalled

-

Single batterycapacity

Single battery capacity refers to thecapacity of a single battery in abattery string managed by theiBOX.

Obtain the batterycapacity from thebattery label ordocument.



Parameter Description Remarks

Current source 0–xxxA HallThe actual specifications of the Halleffect sensor prevail.

-

Battery stringNo.

Set this parameter based on theplanned codes for iBOXs andbattery strings.

Set this parameterbased on thecustomer's plan.

----End

6.8.2 Networking iBOXs and iBATs in Wireless Mode

Prerequisites

Before networking, ensure that all the iBOXs and iBATs have no networkparameters, that is, the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is steady green and theRUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is steady red.

NO TE

● The iBAT is connected to the iBOX in RF_Z networking mode.

● If the RF_Z indicator on the iBOX is not steady on (green), press and hold down thenetworking switch on the iBOX for 10–20 seconds to clear the original network.

● If the RUN/ALM indicator on the iBAT is not steady red, hold down the iBAT networkingswitch for at least 5 seconds to clear the original network.

Context● If multiple iBOXs are connected, commission the iBOX one by one in the same

way. Otherwise, networking may be in disorder.● Indicator status:

– Blinking at long intervals: The indicator is on for 1 second and then offfor 1 second alternately.

– Blinking at super short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.05 seconds andthen off for 0.05 seconds alternately.

– Blinking at short intervals: The indicator is on for 0.125 seconds and thenoff for 0.125 seconds alternately.

Procedure

Step 1 Press the networking switch on the iBOX for 2 seconds. The ALM indicator blinksred once, and the RF_Z indicator turns from steady green to blinking green atsuper short intervals, which indicates that the iBOX is being networked.

Step 2 Press the iBAT networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RUN/ALM indicatorturns from steady red to blinking green at super short intervals (iBattery 2.0) orshort intervals (iBattery 3.0), and finally to blinking green at long intervals, theiBAT connects to the iBOX network.



NO TE

● It is recommended that iBATs be networked from the positive battery string terminalaccording to the battery cable connection sequence.

● Batteries are numbered depending on the sequence of connecting iBATs to the iBOXs.

Step 3 Perform networking operations on the next iBAT only after networking for theprevious iBAT is successful. Repeat Step 2 to add other iBATs to the iBOX network.

Step 4 Press the iBOX networking switch for 2 seconds. When the RF_Z indicator on theiBOX turns from blinking green at super short intervals to blinking green at longintervals, the networking is complete.

NO TE

After the networking is complete, if the ALM indicator on the iBOX is steady on, thenumber of devices online is smaller than the value of iBAT Number. Check that iBATNumber is set to a correct value and that the iBAT is successfully networked.

Step 5 (Optional) If multiple iBOXs are cascaded, repeat Step 1 to Step 4 to performnetworking for remaining iBOXs and iBATs.

----End

6.8.3 Battery Shallow Discharge TestTo facilitate O&M, you can configure a battery shallow discharge test on theLinkage Control tab page.

PrerequisitesOnly the UPS2000-G-(6 kVA–10 kVA) and UPS2000-G-3 kVA (dual-live wire)support a battery shallow discharge test on the ECC800-Pro.

You need to manually configure the battery shallow discharge test based onrequirements.

The system type is FusionModule500.

NO TICE

1. It is recommended that you perform a battery shallow discharge test only in aclass 1 power grid scenario after confirming with the customer. If the powergrid is not stable, do not perform the battery shallow discharge test.

2. After the UPS is powered off, the battery maintenance period of the UPS willbe recalculated.

3. During a battery shallow discharge test, if the mains outage occurs, the backupcapacity may be inconsistent with the rated capacity.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > Linkage Control. Set Enable linkage control functionto Yes and click Submit.



Step 3 Set Battery shallow discharge test to On.

Step 4 On the Linkage Logical List tab page, click Add or the edit icon .

Figure 6-69 Setting parameters for Linkage Logic List

----End



6.9 Asset Management

Asset Management Flowchart

6.9.1 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager (Connectedto a Rack Environment Unit)

6.9.1.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager

If a smart U space manager is installed, perform the following steps to configureit.

Prerequisites

Connect the smart U space manager to the COM1 or COM2 port on the rackenvironment unit.



Procedure


Step 2 View the position of the smart U space manager.1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet > Smart U Space Manager.2. Select Running Control and click Blink. In the actual environment, you will

see that the smart U space manager blinks to ensure that the device locationin the view is consistent with that in the smart module.

Figure 6-70 Viewing the position of the smart U space manager

----End

6.9.1.2 Querying the U Space Use Information

Prerequisites● The ECC800-Pro is connected to the NMS that supports asset management.● The actual assets of the smart module have been allocated.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View to access the Plan View page, where you can createor modify the views of the smart module. Drag the icon of a registered device ordevice in the cabinet list to the planned position to generate the plan view.

Step 3 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Smart U Space Manager1, checkU space quantity, U Space Information and so on.

----End

6.9.2 Commissioning the Smart U Space Manager (Connectedto a UIM20A Expansion Module)

6.9.2.1 Determining the Position of the Smart U Space Manager

If a smart U space manager is installed, perform the following steps to configureit.



Prerequisites● Connect the smart U space manager to the COM port on the UIM20A

expansion module.

NO TE

● In a standard scenario, connect a smart U space manager to the COM6/AIDI_6 porton the UIM20A expansion module.

● In a scenario where one UIM20A expansion module maps to four cabinets, connectsmart U space managers to the COM1/AIDI_1, COM3/AIDI_3, COM5/AIDI_5, andCOM7/AIDI_7 ports on the UIM20A expansion module. If the number of IT cabinetsis not an integer multiple of 4, according to the cable connection rules, leave theunconnected COM ports on the UIM20A expansion module idle.

● The smart U space manager has been connected to the ECC800-Pro throughautomatic discovery.

Procedure


Step 2 View the position of the smart U space manager.1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Smart U Space Manager.2. Select Running Control and click Blink. In the actual environment, you will

see that the smart U space manager blinks to ensure that the device locationin the view is consistent with that in the smart module.

Figure 6-71 Viewing the position of the smart U space manager

----End

6.9.2.2 Querying the U Space Use Information

Prerequisites● The ECC800-Pro is connected to the NMS that supports asset management.● The actual assets of the smart module have been allocated.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View to access the Plan View page, where you can createor modify the views of the smart module. Drag the icon of a registered device ordevice in the cabinet list to the planned position to generate the plan view.



Step 3 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Smart U Space Manager1, checkU space quantity, U Space Information and so on.

----End

6.10 Power Management

6.10.1 Configuring Power Management Parameters

Prerequisites● The power distribution device has been connected to the ECC800-Pro.

NO TE

The following types of power distribution devices are supported: PDU8000, integratedUPS, integrated PDU, and busway.

● The smart module plan view has been created, and the device positions in theplan view are consistent with actual positions.

Context

IT cabinets, network cabinets, and smart cooling products support powermanagement. The ECC800-Pro connected to an IT cabinet is used as an examplein this section.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Home > Plan View > Modify Device and click Apply Power DistributionStandard Configuration to use the default configuration to configure electricityfor devices in the smart module. The following scenarios support the function ofapplying default electricity configuration:● N+1 scenario: The system has only one PDC and is working in single-power

supply mode.● 2N non-isolation scenario: The system has only one PDC and is working in

dual-power supply mode.● 2N isolation scenario: The system has two PDCs and is working in single-

power supply mode.

NO TE

For details about the power distribution solution, refer to the power distribution wiring diagramsupplied with the product.

Step 3 Double-click an IT cabinet to access the Basic Configuration page.

Step 4 Check whether the branch information configured on the Power distributionstandard is consistent with the actual situation. Set power configurationparameters based on site requirements, such as the Device Name, Cabinetheight, Power system, Number of power supplies, and Rated cabinet power.



NO TE

The settings in the following table are used as examples to describe the basic configuration.

Table 6-41 Basic configuration

Parameter Setting Description

Device Name IT Cabinet101

Set based on the actual devicename.

Cabinet height 42 U space quantity of thecabinet.

Cabinet width 600 The width of the cabinet.

PowerDistributionParameterSettings

Power system Single-phase Set single-phase or three-phase based on the actualpower supply.

Number ofpowersupplies

2 rPDU quantity.

Rated cabinetpower

6.00 Set based on the actual ratedpower of the cabinet.

rPDU-A01 PDU80001 >1QF1(L1)

Select a power distributiondevice and power distributionbranch for the rPDUnumbered rPDU-A01 in thecabinet.

rPDU-B01 PDU80001 >2QF1(L1)

Select a power distributiondevice and power distributionbranch for the rPDUnumbered rPDU-B01 in thecabinet.

Branch auto-fill mode ● Ascendingorder

● Descending order

● Ascending order: If thebranch for the first cabinetis 1QF1(L1), 2QF1(L1), thebranches for subsequentcabinets are 1QF2(L2),2QF2(L2), and the like.

● Descending order: If thebranch for the first cabinetis 1QF10(L1), 2QF10(L1),the branches forsubsequent cabinets are1QF9(L3), 2QF9(L3), andthe like.



Figure 6-72 Power configuration

NO TE

● If Apply to all cabinets is selected, all other cabinets use this configuration.● If Clear the power distribution configuration of all cabinets is selected, the power

distribution configuration of all cabinets will be cleared.

Step 5 Click Finish after checking that electricity has been configured for all IT cabinets,network cabinets, and smart cooling products.

Step 6 Click Exit Edit Mode to exit the view editing page of the smart module.

Step 7 Choose Monitoring > Cabinet, and set Cabinet load factor overhigh alarmthreshold (default value: 90) on the Running Parameters page. For example, ifyou set the alarm threshold for the cabinet load rate to 90, an alarm is generatedwhen the load rate of the device in the smart module exceeds 90 of the ratedpower of the cabinet.

NO TE

The alarm hysteresis is 5% by default. That is, if the cabinet load factor overhigh alarmthreshold is 90%, the raised alarm will be cleared when the load factor drops to a value smallerthan 85%.

----End



6.10.2 Setting Fault Isolation Parameters

Context● Battery trip: Once the function is enabled, the abnormal battery string trips if

the battery pole temperature detected by the iBAT exceeds the fire protectionpoint. Then the battery string fault information is displayed in the powersupply and distribution link diagram.

● Smart rPDU high temperature disconnection: Whenever the ECC800-Prodetects excessive high temperature of an rPDU branch, it disconnects theentire rPDU to protect the IT devices. Then the rPDU branch fault informationis displayed in the power supply and distribution link diagram.

● Smart rPDU overcurrent disconnection: Whenever the ECC800-Pro detectsovercurrent of an rPDU branch, it disconnects the rPDU of this branch toprotect the IT devices. Then the rPDU branch fault information is displayed inthe power supply and distribution link diagram.

NO TE

A non-intelligent rPDU does not have the fault isolation function.

Procedure

Step 1 Set parameters for BCB tripping upon battery abnormal.1. Choose Monitoring > Power Distribution > iBOXn to access the Running

Parameters page.2. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, set BCB tripping upon battery

abnormal to Enabled, and click Submit.

Step 2 Set the Smart rPDU auto disconnection parameters.1. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > Running Parameters and click Smart

Distribution Information.2. Set rPDU auto close enable to Enabled.3. If the user has no special requirements, choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT

Cabinet > rPDU > Running Parameters and retain the default value ofBranch Auto Close Current Parameter.

----End

6.10.3 Viewing the Power Usage

PrerequisitesPower distribution devices have been connected to the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure

Step 1 View the power information on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet to access the Electricity Information in Each

Cabinet page.



3. View the power usage information about each cabinet, such as the CurrentPower (kW), Power Consumption (kWh), and Load Percentage (%).

4. Choose Monitoring > System. In the Power Information area on theRunning Info tab page, you can view the power information about the smartmodule.

5. Choose Home > Plan View. In the PUE area, you can view the transientmPUE.

NO TE

– Transient mPUE = Total input power/Total IT power of the smart module. For example,if a PDU8000 with the total input power of 5 kW connects to the smart module, whosetotal IT power is 3.6 kW, the transient mPUE = 5 kW/3.6 kW = 1.39.

– If the power management is not configured, the PUE area in Plan View displays theaverage PUE.

– Instant is displayed for a transient mPUE.

Step 2 View the power information on the ECC800-Pro app.1. Connect the pad to the WiFi network of the ECC800-Pro in the room.2. Choose Home > Power to view the proportion of used power for each

cabinet.3. Choose Home > Resource > Power to view the real-time power and rated

power for the entire smart module as well as the real-time power for eachcabinet, and check whether the used power exceeds the alarm threshold.

----End

6.10.4 Viewing the Power Supply Links Diagram

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the pad to the WiFi network of the ECC800-Pro in the room.

Step 2 Log in to the ECC800-Pro app as an administrator.

Step 3 View the power supply status of the smart module and basic information abouteach device in real time to quickly locate faults.



Figure 6-73 Power supply links diagram

Table 6-42 Specifications of the power supply links diagram

Item Specifications

1 Two AC inputs for IT cabinets

2 Two AC inputs for smart cooling products

3 Tap to view the IT cabinets connected in real time.

4 IT cabinet (tap to view the cabinet name, current power, and status)● Yellow: The cabinet has an alarm. Tap to view the alarm.● Blue: The cabinet is running properly.● Gray: The cabinet is not running.

5 rPDU● Yellow: smart rPDU (Click to view the rPDU number, current, and

status)● Blue or green: non-smart rPDU

6 Branch switch

7 SPD switch



Item Specifications

8 SPD

9 Main switch

----End

6.11 Cooling Capacity Management

6.11.1 (Optional) Setting Cooling Management Parameters

Working Principle of the iCooling FunctionThe smart cooling product models that support iCooling linkage are air cooledsmart cooling products (NetCol5000-A025, NetCol5000-A042, and NetCol5000-A050). The function of iCooling linkage is to enable smart cooling products toquickly respond to load changes and implement on-demand cooling. Multiplesmart cooling products in a smart module and the indoor and outdoor units of asmart cooling product can be regulated to achieve optimal energy efficiencywithout hotspots.

● iCooling disabled– For the cold aisle containment in the smart module, all IT cabinets use

the cooling capacity in the cold aisle and the temperatures inside the coldaisle are unevenly distributed due to the uneven air flow.

– The cooling requirements of the IT cabinets can be met and partial hotspots can be avoided only if the cooling capacity provided by the smartcooling product matches the heat load of the corresponding IT cabinets.

● iCooling enabled– The cold aisle is divided into multiple areas according to the smart

cooling product positions. The cooling capacity from any smart coolingproduct in the areas can meet the temperature requirements of the ITcabinets because the temperature unevenness is relatively low.

– The smart cooling products in each area quickly respond to load changesin the areas and are regulated to achieve optimal energy efficiency.

Prerequisites for the iCooling FunctionBefore setting the iCooling function, the following requirements must be met:● Determine the installation position for the cabinet temperature sensor in strict

accordance with the requirements in the installation guide.● After installing the cabinet equipment, use filler panels to seal the vacant U

space.● The smart module plan view has been created. The positions of devices in the

smart module plan view must be the same as their actual locations.● All smart cooling products in the smart module need to be networked for

teamwork. For details about how to configure teamwork networking, see the



smart cooling product user manual of the corresponding model. One smartmodule has only one group. In this group, communication between the slaveand master units as well as communication between the master unit and theECC800-Pro is normal.

● The WebUI displays the Enable iCooling page only for smart cooling productsthat support the iCooling function.

● The scenario is dual-row cold aisle containment and the following conditionsare met:

– Smart cooling product should be placed face to face.

– The smart module is configured with an integrated UPS or integratedPDU. Electricity has been configured for IT cabinets, network cabinets,and smart cooling products. The ECC800-Pro collects statistics on ITbranch power information, which is mapped to IT cabinets and networkcabinets.

– Rack environment units or UIM20A expansion module and cabinet-leveltemperature sensors are installed for IT cabinets or network cabinets. TheECC800-Pro can monitor the temperature of each cabinet.

– At least one cold-aisle temperature and humidity sensor is installed foreach smart cooling product, and each smart cooling product can detectthe sensor readings.

WebUI Operations


Step 2 If the iCooling function needs to be used, choose Monitoring > Cooling >Running Parameters. On the iCooling parameter setting page, set EnableiCooling to Yes and click Submit to finish the iCooling function setting.

Figure 6-74 Setting the iCooling function

Step 3 Set the iCooling temperature set point and humidity setpoint according to theactual environment.

Figure 6-75 Setting the temperature and humidity setpoints



NO TE

● When iCooling is enabled, smart cooling products enter the iCooling teamwork controlmode.

● The temperature and humidity refer to the values at the air intake vents of the ITcabinets.

● After iCooling linkage is enabled, if the preceding conditions are not met, the smartcooling product automatically exits the iCooling teamwork mode and enters thestandalone mode. To view Team work status, choose Monitoring > Cooling >NetCol5000 > Running Info > Status Information.

● When iCooling is enabled, the T/H threshold can only be set on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

● When iCooling is disabled, smart cooling products enter the intelligent teamworkcontrol mode (teamwork control of smart cooling products).

Step 4 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the Temperatureand Humidity Parameters page. Check whether Temperature and humiditycontrol type is Cold-aisle.

----End

6.11.2 Viewing Cooling Capacity Usage Information

Prerequisites

Smart cooling products have been connected to the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the PAD to the WiFi network of the corresponding ECC800-Pro in theroom.

Step 2 Choose Home > Temp.. The view displays the temperature distribution map ofeach cabinet.

Step 3 Choose Home > Resource Consump > Cooling, view the real-time coolingcapacity and maximum cooling capacity of the smart module as well as the real-time cooling capacity of each cabinet, and check whether the cooling capacityexceeds the alarm threshold.

----End

6.11.3 Viewing the Cooling Links Diagram

Context

When smart cooling products (NetCol5000-A025, NetCol5000-A042, andNetCol5000-A050) are connected to the ECC800-Pro, you can view the cooling linkdiagram.

Procedure




Step 2 Choose Monitoring > Cooling > Running Parameters to access the RunningParameters page. Set Number of redundant smart cooling products and Localyearly highest temperature as required and tap Submit.

Figure 6-76 Setting running parameters

Step 3 Use the pad to connect to the WiFi network of the ECC800-Pro in the room.

Step 4 Log in to the ECC800-Pro app as an administrator.

Step 5 View the cooling distribution information.

Figure 6-77 Cooling links diagram

Table 6-43 Specifications of the cooling links diagram

Item Specifications

1 Color band (Determine whether the temperature of the cooling systemis normal based on the color band.)



Item Specifications

2 Air outlet temperature of the smart cooling product

3 Air inlet temperature of the smart cooling product

4 Smart cooling product status● Blue: The smart cooling product is running.● Gray: The smart cooling product is not running.

5 Alarm status (The alarm icon is displayed based on the alarm severityof the smart cooling product. You can tap the smart cooling product toview the alarm.)

6 Temperature and humidity inside the aisle

Step 6 Tap the corresponding smart cooling product to check the operating status andworking mode of each component in the smart cooling product.

Figure 6-78 Links for a single smart cooling product

Table 6-44 Specifications of the link diagram for a single smart cooling product

Item Specifications

1 Smart cooling product appearance

2 Alarm (tap to view specific alarms)

3 Internal fan

4 Condensate pipe (yellow: high temperature)

5 Air inlet temperature of the smart cooling product

6 Refrigerant status

7 Air outlet temperature of the smart cooling product



----End

6.11.4 Setting the Temperature MapIf the temperature map function is configured, follow the instructions provided inthis section to commission it.

Prerequisites1. Cables to the NTC and T/H sensors have been connected.

Figure 6-79 Wiring diagram for the temperature map function

(1) UIM20A expansionmodule

(2) T/H sensor (3) NTC sensor

NO TE

● Sensors NTC1 to NTC6 are installed in the following positions of the cabinetrespectively: upper part of the front door, middle part of the front door, lower partof the front door, upper part of the rear door, middle part of the rear door, andlower part of the rear door.

● A maximum of eight T/H sensors can be cascaded to each COM port.

● A T/H sensor can be connected only to the COM1, COM3, COM5, or COM7 port onthe UIM20A expansion module.

Context

The BOM number of T/H sensors is 02311FQG or 02312PBL.



ProcedureStep 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.

Set the T/H sensor device address through the DIP switch on the T/H sensor.

Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set device addresses, toggle switch 7 is reserved,and toggle switch 8 is used to switch the temperature unit.

Device addresses are set in binary coding format in the range of 1–63. The first bitis the least significant bit, and the sixth bit is the most significant bit. ON indicates1, and OFF indicates 0.

Figure 6-80 T/H sensor DIP switch

NO TE

● In the smart module view on the ECC800-Pro WebUI, cabinets are arranged from left toright and from top to bottom according to T/H sensor addresses 1 to 8.

● Each COM port on the UIM20A expansion module allows a maximum of eight T/Hsensors to be cascaded. Each UIM20A expansion module supports a maximum of 32 T/Hsensors.

● The addresses of the T/H sensors connected to the same COM port must be different.Addresses 1 to 8 are supported. The addresses of T/H sensors connected to differentCOM ports can be the same. In actual configuration, bind sensors to the correspondingcabinets in sequence.

● If the number of IT cabinets connected to the smart module is greater than 32, two userinterface modules are required. A UIM20A expansion module must be placed in the firstcabinet of the corresponding IT cabinets. Then the remaining cabinets need to beinstalled in sequence. The cable connection principles are the same.

● Set the T/H sensor addresses onsite based on the layout in the smart module view.

Step 2 Add the T/H sensor.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add the T/H sensor.

Choose System Settings > Device Management and click Auto DiscoverDevice to add the T/H sensor. The device connection information is displayed.

Figure 6-81 Device connection



Step 3 Bind the T/H sensor to the cabinet referring to Commissioning a UIM20AExpansion Module.

Step 4 Check functions of the T/H sensor.



Check the runninginformation about theT/H sensor on theWebUI.

Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > T/HSensor n > Running Info, and check the current T/Hand NTC information of the cabinet.

Set T/H sensor alarmthresholds.

Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > T/HSensor n > Running Parameters, and set Hightemperature alarm threshold, Low temperaturealarm threshold, High humidity alarm threshold, andLow humidity alarm threshold as required.NOTE

The default values of High temperature alarm threshold,Low temperature alarm threshold, High humidity alarmthreshold, and Low humidity alarm threshold are 30.0°C,5.0°C, 85.0% RH, and 15.0% RH, respectively.

----End

6.12 Facial Recognition

6.12.1 Recording Facial Data

Prerequisites

The FusionModule app has been installed on the pad.

Procedure1. You have logged in to the FusionModule app on the pad as an administrator.

2. On the main screen of the app, tap . On the displayed Edit page, selectFace Account Management. After reading the message, tap OK.

3. Click Add to start recording facial data.

NO TE

The facial data is used only for configuring the facial recognition function and is notused for other purposes. The facial data is encrypted during transmission to ensurethat the personal data of users is fully protected.



Figure 6-82 Recording facial data

Table 6-46 Facial data to be recorded

Item Function

1 Tap this icon to start recording facial data.

2 Select the access actuator associated with the facial data.

3 Select the user associated with the facial data.

4. Tap OK.

6.12.2 Collecting and Importing Facial Data in Offline Mode

Prerequisites

The FusionModule app has been installed on the pad and mobile phone.

Context

You can collect facial data and import the collected facial data to other devices inoffline mode for facial recognition.

Procedure

Step 1 Collect facial data in offline mode.1. On the login screen of the app on the mobile phone or pad, tap Settings and

select Face Info Collection to collect facial data.2. In the Face Info Collection dialog box, set Please enter nickname and

Please enter encryption password for the facial data, and tap OK.3. The Message dialog box displays Success and the path for storing facial data.



4. Tap Cancel to complete data collection, or tap Share to share the collecteddata to other devices.

Step 2 Import facial data in offline mode.1. Log in to the FusionModule app as an administrator.

2. On the main screen of the app, tap to go to the Settings screen. SelectFace Account Management, read the message, and tap OK. The FaceAccount Management screen is displayed.

3. Tap Add to go to the Add screen.4. Tap Import and select the facial file that has been collected.5. In the Message dialog box, enter the encryption password of the facial file.6. Tap OK. The facial data is recorded.

Step 3 Associate the facial data.1. Select an access actuator and a user to associate with the facial data.2. Tap OK.

----End

6.12.3 Opening the Access Control System Using FacialRecognition

Prerequisites

The facial data has been recorded.

Opening the Access Control System Using Facial Recognition

Method 1: When you open the access control system for the first time, tap

on the FusionModule app login screen and align the face with thegreen circle on the screen. After facial recognition is successful, log in to the appas an administrator to open the access control system at the same time.

NO TE

After you log in to the system using facial recognition, the system uses facial recognitionfor user authentication the next time by default.

Method 2: Tap in the upper-left corner of the FusionModule apphome screen and align the face with the green circle on the screen. After facialrecognition is successful, log in to the app as an administrator to open the accesscontrol system at the same time.

6.12.4 Maintaining the Facial Data

Prerequisites

The facial data has been recorded.



Procedure

Step 1 Connect the PAD to the WiFi network of the ECC800-Pro in the room.

Step 2 Log in to the FusionModule app on the pad as an administrator.

Step 3 On the app home screen, tap . On the displayed Settings screen, select FaceAccount Management.

Table 6-47 Facial recognition management functions

Operation Purpose

Tap . Modify the access actuator associatedwith the user.

Tap . Delete the facial data.

Step 4 Tap OK.

----End

6.13 Remote Management

6.13.1 NetEco Management

6.13.1.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Procedure

Step 1 Connect a communications cable to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 6-83 Connecting a communications cable

----End

6.13.1.2 Setting NetEco Parameters

When the smart module can be connected to the NetEco, perform the followingsteps to configure parameters.



Procedure

Step 1 Apply for a fixed IP address to the equipment room network administrator.

Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-48 IP parameters

Path Parameter DefaultValue

Setting

SystemSettings >SystemParameters >Monitor IP> WAN_1

IP 192.168.8.10

Set this parameter based on the IPaddress assigned by the networkadministrator.

Subnetmask

255.255.255.0

Set this parameter based on thesubnet mask assigned by the networkadministrator.

Defaultgateway

192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on thedefault gateway address assigned bythe network administrator.

Step 3 Click Submit.

Step 4 Set NetEco communications parameters and authentication password on theECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-49 NetEco parameters


Setting

SystemSettings >NMSApplication> NetEco >CommunicationParameters

NetEcoLocation

Local Set this parameter based on thetype of the connected NetEcomanagement system.Local: NetEcoCloud: CloudOpera NetEco

Server IP 192.168.8.11

IP address of the primary NetEcoserverNOTE

The NetEco IP address and the ECC800-Pro IP address must be configured inthe same network to ensure normalconnection between the NetEco andthe ECC800-Pro.

Port number 31220 31220

Link to themonitoringIP address

WAN_1 WAN_1



Table 6-50 Setting an authentication password


Setting

SystemSettings >NMSApplication> NetEco >SetAuthentication Password

Authentication password

Modifyme_123

Set this parameter based oncustomer requirements.NOTE

Requirements for setting passwords:a–z, A–Z, 0–9, ~!@#^*_={}:,./?-`$ (8–32 characters that include at least three of the following types: digits, lowercase letters, uppercase letters, and special characters)

Confirmauthentication password

- -


----End

6.13.1.3 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the NetEco

Prerequisites● You have logged in to the NetEco client by web browser.● You have created modules in Data Center Planning.

ContextFor detailed operations, see iManager NetEco 6000 Device Installation andCommissioning Guide of the corresponding version.

Procedure1. Choose System > Configuration > Data Center Planning from the main

menu. The Data Center Planning window is displayed.

2. Click in the upper left area of the Data Center Planning window.3. Click Access switch to the Add Device window. You can add an ECC800-Pro

device to the specified modular in the Add Device window.



Figure 6-84 Adding an ECC800-Pro device to the modular

NO TE

Click OK, and you can view the task information, including Type, Device Name,Region, Progress, Status, Start Time, End Time, and Information in the displayedProgress window.

6.13.1.4 Creating an ECC800-Pro on the CloudOpera NetEco

Procedure

Step 1 Connect the ECC800-Pro to the CloudOpera NetEco by referring to the section"Accessing a Site" in the CloudOpera NetEco Online Help.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

On the CloudOpera NetEco management system page, click Site Management toview the outlet access status.

6.13.1.5 Setting the Transparent Transmission Function

Context● Using the transparent transmission function, the NMS can directly manage

southbound components that are not monitored by the ECC800-Pro.● In this example, the COM2 port of the ECC800-Pro is used for transparent

transmission.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > NMS Application > Transparent TransmissionChannel.



Step 3 Set COM2(Port:3212) to Enable and click Submit.

Figure 6-85 Transparent transmission channel

Table 6-51 Mapping between ECC800-Pro ports and port numbers

COM Port COM1 COM2 COM3 COM4

Port Number 3211 3212 3213 3214

If a device is connected to a COM port on the UIM20A expansion module, the portnumber is displayed on the WebUI after transparent transmission is enabled forthe COM port and the configuration is saved. For example, the port number ofCOM1 on UIM1 is 3215 in Figure 6-85.

NO TE

● An ECC800-Pro can connect to a maximum of four UIM20A expansion modules with thetransparent transmission function.

● A UIM20A expansion module provides a maximum of eight COM ports with thetransparent transmission function.

● If the port is set for the first time, you are prompted to set an authenticationpassword. On the Set Authentication Password tab page, setAuthentication password and Confirm authentication password and clickSubmit.

NO TE

Enable security Authentication is set to Enable by default. If so, an authenticationpassword must be set. If Enable security Authentication is set to Disable, there is noneed to set an authentication password but this is risky.

● If the port has been used, you will be prompted that the transparenttransmission function cannot be enabled and you need to select an idle port.

Step 4 Log in to the NetEco WebUI as an administrator.

Step 5 Choose System > Configuration > Data Center Planning. The Data CenterPlanning window is displayed.

Step 6 Select the management domain to add a device. The management domain can bea micro-module, container, cabinet or computer room.



Step 7 (Optional) If the management domain is a rack, click the management domain

and choose Design under . The page for adding a device is displayed.Otherwise, skip this step.

Step 8 In the lower-left corner of the page, click the Device tab. Click the drop-down listbox in Type and select Sensor.

Step 9 In this example, a Polymer temperature and humidity (T/H) sensor is added in theequipment room of the root node. Select the device to be added and drag its iconto the management domain.

Step 10 Set management attributes.

Figure 6-86 Page for setting management attributes

NO TE

IP Address indicates the ECC800-Pro login IP address. Port indicates the ECC800-Pro COM2port (3212). Device Address indicates the Polymer T/H sensor address.

Step 11 Click to save the created device view.

Step 12 Choose System > Configuration > Transmission Channel Management.

Step 13 Click Modify after selecting the IP address of the ECC800-Pro connected to theNMS.



● If Connection mode is set to Compatible, click Confirm.

NO TE

On the ECC800-Pro WebUI, Enable Security Authentication is set to Disable.

● If Connection mode is set to Security protocol, enter the value of Confirmpassword that has been set on the ECC800-Pro WebUI, and click Confirm.

Figure 6-87 Page for managing transparent transmission channels

----End

6.13.2 Third-party NMS Management (over SNMP)

6.13.2.1 Connecting a Communications Cable

Procedure

Step 1 Connect a communications cable to the WAN1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

Figure 6-88 Connecting a communications cable

----End

6.13.2.2 Setting SNMP Management Parameters

Prerequisites

Before setting SNMP parameters, obtain the information listed as follows from theNMS.



Table 6-52 Information obtained from the NMS

Item DefaultValue

Description

SNMP version SNMPv3 SNMP version and port number used by theECC800-Pro and NMS. The SNMP versionsinclude SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3.SNMP port number 161

● Read communityname

● Writecommunityname

- If you use SNMPv1 or SNMPv2c, enter theread and write community names that complywith the NMS. Otherwise, the ECC800-Pro willnot connect to the NMS. The read communityname must be different from the writecommunity name.

● User name● MD5/SHA

password● DES/AES

password

- To enhance the security, you need a username and password for authentication if youuse SNMPv3. After the authenticationsucceeds, the ECC800-Pro can communicatewith the NMS.

Trap target address - IP address of the NMS server.

Trap port 162 Port defined by the user.

Context● SNMPv3 parameters should be set before connecting the ECC800-Pro to the

NMS. These parameters are required for setting up the ECC800-Pro on theNMS.

● SNMPv1 and SNMPv2c are insecure. Therefore, SNMPv3 is recommended.This section uses SNMPv3 as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 Apply to the equipment room network administrator for a fixed IP address.

Step 2 Set the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Table 6-53 IP parameters


Setting

SystemSettings >SystemParameters >Monitor IP> WAN_1

IP 192.168.8.10

Set this parameter based on the IPaddress assigned by the networkadministrator.

Subnetmask

255.255.255.0

Set this parameter based on thesubnet mask assigned by the networkadministrator.




Setting

Defaultgateway

192.168.8.1 Set this parameter based on thedefault gateway address assigned bythe network administrator.

Step 3 Set SNMP parameters.1. Choose System Settings > NMS Application > SNMP.2. Set SNMP Version to SNMPv3 and set SNMP port number to the required

port number or retain its default value 161.3. Click Submit under SNMP.4. Click Add under SNMPv3.5. Set User name, set Authentication protocol to SHA or MD5, set Privacy

protocol to AES or DES, and specify MD5/SHA password, Confirm MD5/SHApassword, DES/AES password, and Confirm DES/AES password.

NO TE

– Set User name, MD5/SHA password, and DES/AES password to any characterstrings that meet the system requirements. Note that MD5/SHA password andDES/AES password must be set to different values. Record the settings.

– MD5 and DES are insecure protocols. Therefore, you are advised to setAuthentication protocol to SHA or set Privacy protocol to AES.

6. Set Password validity period and Advance expiration notification (days).7. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.8. Click Add under SNMP Trap.9. Set Trap target address and Trap port, set SNMP version to SNMPv3, and

specify SNMPv3 user name. Set Trap target address to the IP address of theNMS server and set Trap port to the port defined by the user.

10. After setting the parameters, click Confirm.11. Click Export in the Mib File pane, export the MIB file, and send it to the

development engineers of the NMS.

NO TE

For enterprise users: Log in to http://support.huawei.com/enterprise, download thesoftware package of the required version from Support > Software Download >Network Energy > Fusion Modular Data Center > ECC800, and decompress thesoftware package to obtain the MIB file.For carrier users: Log in to http://support.huawei.com, download the software packageof the required version from Support > Software > Carrier Cloud & Data Center >Data Center Facility > Fusion Modular Data Center > ECC800, and decompress thesoftware package to obtain the MIB file.

----End

6.14 Setting Other Parameters and Channel SecurityChoose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > Unhide AllAdvanced Signals > Other Parameters.



Table 6-54 Other parameters

Signal Name Signal Value Description

Synchronize systemtime to device

Enable/Disable Whether to synchronize thesystem time to devices thatsupport time synchronization.After this function is enabled, theECC synchronizes time parametersto devices that support timesynchronization every 4 hours.

Upgrade packagesignature verification

Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theupgrade package signatureverification function.

Communication portstatus

Displayed/Notdisplayed

Indicates whether to display thecommunication port status of theaccess actuator, skylight actuator,FusionModule Actuator, and multi-functional sensor.

Alarm convergenceenable

Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use the alarmconvergence function. After thisfunction is enabled, only rootalarms are reported.

Key update interval 30–1095 days Set the interval for automaticallyupdating the key.

SNMP Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theSNMP communication port.

RSTP Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use the RSTPcommunication port.

Transparenttransmission channelport

Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use thetransparent transmission channelport.

SSH Enable/Disable Indicates whether to enable loginto the ECC over SSH.

Cascading port Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use thecascading port.

High-density islandsolution

Yes/No Indicates whether to enable thehigh-density island solution.

Manually updating akey

Yes The system provides the automatickey update function. Manualupdate is required only if the keyis disclosed. Select the parameterand click Submit.



Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > Unhide AllAdvanced Signals > Channel Security Configuration.

Table 6-55 Channel security configuration

Signal Name Signal Value Description

NetEco encryptionalgorithm CBC

Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theencryption algorithm with the CBCmode when connecting to theNetEco.

Transparenttransmissionencryption algorithmCBC

Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theencryption algorithm with the CBCmode during transparenttransmission.

Email channel TLS1.1 Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theTLS1.1 protocol when sendingemails.

Web channel TLS1.1 Enable/Disable Indicates whether to use theTLS1.1 protocol when logging in tothe WebUI or app.



7 Maintenance

7.1 Routine Maintenance

Table 7-1 Routine maintenance for the PSU in the ECC800-Pro

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting

AC input Input voltage: 200–240 VACFrequency: 45–66 Hz

If the input voltage is abnormal,check the power grid and inputcable connection.

Outputvoltage

Output voltage: 53.5 V DC(tolerance ±5%)

If the output voltage is abnormal,check the load power and cableconnection.

Indicator The green indicator issteady on, and the redindicator is faulty.

Check the output voltage anddetermine whether the PSU isfaulty. If the PSU is faulty, replace it.

Fan No abnormal noise isgenerated.

If abnormal noise is generated,clean the fan.

Operatingenvironment

● Ambient temperature:–20°C to +50°C

● Humidity: 0-95% RH(non-condensing)

If the temperature or humidity isabnormal, check the smart coolingproduct status.

Cableconnection

The cable connection issecure.

Secure loose cables.

Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 7 Maintenance


Table 7-2 Routine maintenance for the main control module in the ECC800-Pro

Check Item Expected Result Troubleshooting

Indicator The green indicator issteady on or blinking.

If the indicator is off or anyabnormal condition occurs, seecommon faults and troubleshootingto rectify the fault.

Networkportindicator

The green indicator issteady on, and the yellowindicator is blinking.

If the indicator status is abnormal,check the network cable connection.

Operatingenvironment

● Ambient temperature:–20°C to +50°C

● Humidity: 5–95% RH(non-condensing)

If the humidity or temperature isabnormal, check the smart coolingproduct status.

Cableconnection

The cable connection issecure.

Secure loose cables.

Cables are not damaged. Replace damaged cables.

7.2 Common Faults and Troubleshooting

Table 7-3 Common faults and troubleshooting for PSUs

Symptom Possible Cause Measure

The PWR indicator(green) is off.

There is no AC input. Check whether the ACinput is abnormal.

The PSU is faulty. Replace the PSU.

The ALM indicator(yellow) is steady on.

Over temperatureprotection is triggered.

● The ambienttemperature exceedsthe upper threshold,and the coolingcapacity of the smartcooling product needsto be increased.

● The air channel isobstructed and needsto be unblocked.

AC input overvoltage orundervoltage protectionis triggered.

Check whether the ACinput is abnormal.

The ALM indicator(yellow) is blinking.

Communication with thePSU is interrupted.

1. Clean the connectorin the rear of thefaulty PSU.




Communication with themain control module isinterrupted.

2. If the fault persists,replace the ECC800-Pro subrack.

The ALM indicator (red)is steady on.

Output overvoltageprotection is triggered.

If the PSU is locked out,disconnect the AC inputfrom the PSU, and thenpower on the PSU againafter the indicator turnsoff. If the fault persists,replace the PSU.

There is no output dueto a PSU fault.

Replace the faulty PSU.

Table 7-4 Common faults and troubleshooting for the main control module


The RUN indicator (green)is off.

There is no AC input. If the green indicators onPSUs are steady on, thepower input to thesystem is normal.Otherwise, rectify powergrid faults.

The main controlmodule is faulty or notsecurely installed.

Reinstall the maincontrol module. If thefault persists, replace themain control module.

The RUN indicator (green)is blinking at 5 Hz.

The main controlmodule does notregister with theNetEco.

Register the main controlmodule with the NetEco.

RJ45 power outputindicators turn off(involved ports: AIDI_1 -AIDI_5, COM1-COM4, andDO).

The correspondingpower ports have nooutput.

Energize correspondingpower ports over theWebUI or NMS.

The correspondingpower ports are short-circuited.

Check whether theconnected load is short-circuited. If yes, eliminatethe short circuit.

The ALM indicator (red) issteady on.

An alarm is generated. View active alarms onthe WebUI and clearthem one by one.



Table 7-5 Common faults and troubleshooting for UIM20A expansion module


The RUN indicator is off. The contact between theindependent deploymentAI_DI unit and theECC800-Pro is abnormal,or the independentdeployment AI_DI unit isfaulty.

Check whether the cableconnection between theECC800-Pro and theUIM20A expansionmodule is normal andwhether the board isfaulty.

The RUN indicator isblinking at shortintervals (2.5 Hz, on for0.2s and then off for0.2s).

Communication betweenthe independentdeployment AI_DI unitand the main controlmodule is interrupted.

Check whether the cableconnection between theECC800-Pro and theUIM20A expansionmodule is normal,whether the board isfaulty, and whether theUIM20A expansionmodule is added on theECC800-Pro WebUI.

The ALM indicator is on. An alarm whose defaultseverity is major exists.

Check and clear thealarm.

Table 7-6 Common faults and troubleshooting for the independent deploymentAI_DI unit


The PWR indicator is off. The independentdeployment AI_DI unit isfaulty or the power tothe independentdeployment AI_DI unit isabnormal.

Check whether the boardis faulty and whether thecable connectionbetween the ECC800-Proand independentdeployment AI_DI unit isnormal.

The RUN indicator is off. The contact between theindependent deploymentAI_DI unit and theECC800-Pro is abnormal,or the independentdeployment AI_DI unit isfaulty.

Check whether theindependent deploymentAI_DI unit is faulty andwhether the cableconnection between theECC800-Pro andindependent deploymentAI_DI unit is normal.




The RUN indicator isblinking at shortintervals (on for 0.125sand then off for 0.125s).

Communication betweenthe independentdeployment AI_DI unitand the main controlmodule is interrupted.

Check whether the cableconnection between theECC800-Pro andindependent deploymentAI_DI unit is normal,whether the independentdeployment AI_DI unit isfaulty, and whether theindependent deploymentAI_DI unit is added onthe ECC800-Pro WebUI.

The ALM indicator is on. An alarm whose defaultseverity is major exists.

Check and clear thealarm.

7.3 Component Replacement1. After replacing components, log in to the WebUI and choose Maintenance >

Parameter Sync to access the parameter synchronization page.2. Click Device type and select the component type from the drop-down list.3. Select the failure device in Source Device, select the reserved device in Target

Device, and click Submit to synchronize the configuration parameters of thefailure device to the reserved device.

4. On the Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Controls tab page, select Deletedevice with communication failure and click Submit, add the reserveddevice to the smart module view.

7.3.1 Replacing an ECC800-Pro Main Control Module

Prerequisites

NO TICE

● The ECC800-Pro main control module is hot-swappable.● Before disconnecting cables from the ECC800-Pro main control module, label

the cables based on the corresponding ports.

● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves, Phillips screwdriver, labels, marker● Materials: a new undamaged and undeformed ECC800-Pro main control

module of the appropriate model

Procedure

Step 1 Use the Back Up Current Settings function to record the ECC800-Proconfiguration information or manually record the information.



Path: Maintenance > Configuration File > Back Up Current Settings

NO TE

If the main control module is damaged, you may fail to log in to the ECC800-Pro. In this case,you cannot back up the settings.

The following information cannot be backed up: monitoring module IP address parameters,smart module certificate, NetEco certificate, NetEco second-challenge password, timeconfiguration parameters, access user management, access permission management, deviceaccess certificate, log, and user configuration information.

Step 2 Label each cable and antenna based on the corresponding ports on the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 3 Remove cables, USB flash drive, USB-to-WiFi module, and antennas from theECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 4 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module and pullthe handles on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module to remove themain control module.

Figure 7-1 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 5 (Optional) Remove the SIM card from the corresponding slots of the ECC800-Promain control module.

Step 6 (Optional) Install the removed SIM card in the corresponding slot of the newECC800-Pro main control module.

Figure 7-2 Installing a SIM card

Step 7 Install the spare ECC800-Pro main control module in the ECC800-Pro subrack andtighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.



Step 8 Connect the communications cables and antennas to the ECC800-Pro main controlmodule.

Step 9 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and import the backup configurationfile, or set parameters for the devices that connect to the ECC800-Pro to ensurenormal communication.

----End

7.3.2 Replacing an ECC800-Pro PSU

Prerequisites

D ANGER

Do not touch the terminals in the rear of a removed PSU to avoid electric shocks.

● Tool: insulation gloves

● Materials: a reserved undamaged and undeformed PSU of the appropriatemodel.

Context

The PSU is hot-swappable.

Procedure

Step 1 Push the locking latch in the upper right corner of the PSU panel leftwards.

Step 2 Pull out the handle of the PSU to remove the PSU from the subrack.

Step 3 Gently push the reserved PSU into the subrack along guide rails, and push thelocking latch rightwards to secure the handle.

Figure 7-3 Replacing a PSU

----End



7.3.3 Replacing ECC800-Pro Antennas

Prerequisites● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves

● Materials: Spare ECC800-Pro antennas of the same model are available andfunctional.

Procedure

Step 1 Remove the 4G antenna cables and RF_Z antenna cables connected to the portson the ECC800-Pro, as shown in Figure 7-4.

Figure 7-4 Removing antennas

Step 2 Install the spare 4G antenna cables and RF_Z antenna cables in the originalpositions and connect them to the ECC800-Pro.

----End

7.3.4 Replacing a SIM Card

Prerequisites● Tools: ESD wrist strap, ESD gloves

● Materials: A spare SIM card of the same model are available and functional.

Procedure

Step 1 Record the position of the signal cable connected to the ECC800-Pro main controlmodule panel, and then disconnect the signal cable.

Step 2 Loosen the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 3 Pull the handles on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module, and toremove the main control module.



Figure 7-5 Removing the ECC800-Pro main control module

Step 4 Remove the SIM card from the card slot.

Figure 7-6 Removing a SIM card

Step 5 Insert the spare SIM card into the card slot.

Figure 7-7 Installing a SIM card

Step 6 Install the ECC800-Pro main control module in the card slot.

Step 7 Tighten the screws on both sides of the ECC800-Pro main control module.

Step 8 Reconnect signal cables to the ECC800-Pro main control module panel based onthe recorded information.

----End



8 FAQ

8.1 WebUI Operations

8.1.1 How Can I View Version Information?

Procedure


Step 2 Click in the upper right corner of the home page and view the ECC800-Proversion information.

Step 3 Choose Maintenance > Version Information and view the version information ofECC800-Pro and connected device.

----End

8.1.2 How Can I Upgrade the ECC800-Pro Software Version?

Procedure

Step 1 Go to the WebUI login page. Enter the user name and password to log in to theECC800-Pro home page.

Step 2 Download the .zip upgrade package from the Huawei enterprise or carrier website.After the decompression, choose Maintenance > System Upgrade on theECC800-Pro WebUI, click Select File, and select the decompressed .tar.gz filepackage to upload.

Step 3 Click Upload on the right of Select File. The upload takes about 1 to 3 minutes.When the system displays the "Uploaded successfully." message, the file isuploaded successfully. Click OK.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 8 FAQ


NO TE

● After the upgrade file is uploaded successfully, the WebUI lists the components andversions that can be upgraded using the upgrade file.

● The ECC800-Pro upgrade package includes the ECC800-Pro software upgrade programand Board Support Package (BSP) software upgrade program.

Step 4 Set Device Type to ECC800 and click Local Upgrade. When a message isdisplayed, click OK to confirm the upgrade or click Cancel to cancel the upgrade.

Step 5 After the monitoring software is upgraded successfully, a message is displayed,indicating that the monitoring module has been upgraded successfully and isrestarting.

NO TE

● After the ECC800-Pro software or BSP software is upgraded successfully, the ECC800-Prosystem will restart. After the restart is complete, log in to the WebUI again.

● Protocols and algorithms are embedded in the software package and do not need to beconfigured. After the software package is installed, all functions are available.

----End

8.1.3 How Can I Set the Date and Time?

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Time.

Step 2 Set the time zone, date, and time, or click Obtain Local Time. Then, click Submit.

Step 3 (Optional) If you want to use the NTP server for time synchronization, select NTPserver sync. Set NTP primary server IP, NTP backup server IP, Port number, andSync interval (min), and click Submit.

----End

8.1.4 How Can I Check the System Type and Set the SmartModule Name?

Context● System type: Select a system type based on the actual project type. The

FusionModule5000, FusionModule2000, FusionModule500/800,FusionModule1000B, FusionModule1000A, FusionModule500, General, andFusionPower6000 scenarios are supported.

● Site ID: Alarms of devices under monitoring in the site are sent to thespecified mobile phone numbers of maintenance engineers by SMS. AfterSmart module name is changed, the new site ID will be displayed in theshort message content (for example, XXX device communication interruption)so that maintenance engineers will know the site where the fault hasoccurred.



Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration, and checkwhether System Type is consistent with the type of the smart module.

(Optional) If the system type is inconsistent with the type of the smart module,perform the following operations. The system type FusionModule2000 is used asan example.

NO TE

● By default, the system type displayed on the WebUI is the system type selected lasttime. Change the system type as required.

● If the system type is changed, the monitoring software will restart and you can log in tothe WebUI again after 3 minutes.

1. Select FusionModule2000 from the System type drop-down list box.2. Click Submit in the System Type area.

Figure 8-1 Setting the system type

3. Go to the Re-authentication page, enter the login user name and password,and click Submit.

Step 2 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration, modifySmart module name, and click Submit in the Site ID area.

----End

8.1.5 How Can I Manage WebUI Users?

Context

WebUI users are classified as Administrator and Operator. They have differentoperation rights.

● Administrator: The user name is admin and password is Changeme bydefault. The administrator has all rights, including the rights for usermanagement, browsing and modifying all parameters in the system, softwareupgrade, and data import and export.

● Operator: The user name is operator and password is Changeme by default.Operator has no rights for user management, system setting, version upgrade,running parameters, smart module plan view editing, and internal faultinformation exporting.



Procedure

Step 1 Change the login password.


2. Choose Maintenance > User Management. The user management page isdisplayed.

3. Choose the user to be modified and click Modify. Reset the login password onthe displayed page.

Figure 8-2 Changing the login password

4. Modify Advance expiration notification (days) and Timeout Interval forthe password.

5. Select password retrieval modes.

Figure 8-3 Modifying parameters



NO TE

– Select Email for Password retrieval mode, set Email Address, and click Test. Afterthe test is successful, you can retrieve the password using the email address.

– Select Short message for Password retrieval mode, set Mobile Number, and clickTest. After the test is successful, you can retrieve the password by SMS.

Step 2 Add a WebUI user.

1. Choose Maintenance > User Management. The user management page isdisplayed.

2. Click Add.

3. Specify User name, Password, Confirm password, Password validity period,Advance expiration notification (days), and Timeout Interval, selectappropriate values from the Access right and Login source drop-down listboxes, and click Confirm.

NO TE

– On the user management page, you can modify, delete, lock, and unlock a user.

– The value of Advance expiration notification (days) must not be greater thanthe value of Password validity period.

– You can choose the password retrieval mode as required, either by email or SMS orby both.

– The WebUI supports a maximum of 16 users and a maximum of 3 concurrentonline users.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

If you forgot the password, perform the following steps:

1. Click Forgot password.

Figure 8-4 Clicking Forgot password

2. Specify the user name. Enter the verification code.



Figure 8-5 Retrieving a password

3. Click Next to retrieve the password.

8.1.6 How Do I Create a Smart Module Plan View?

PrerequisitesTo create a smart module plan view, it is recommended that you obtain or drawthe planned layout of the smart modular data center before the creation.

ProcedureStep 1 Choose Home > Plan View and click Create smart module in Smart Module

View. The Modify Basic Config dialog box is displayed. Set the layout and devicequantity in Layout and Half-size cabinet qty./row based on the actual smartmodule scenario.

Figure 8-6 Modifying basic configurations

● If Room monitoring is set to No, draw a smart module view.● If Room monitoring is set to Yes, draw equipment room view and smart

module view.

Step 2 Click Modify Device and create a smart module plan view.● Drag the icons of registered devices (for example, the access actuator) and

devices on the cabinet list to appropriate positions in the layout, click a deviceicon, modify the value of Device Name in the displayed Basic Configurationdialog box, and click Exit Edit Mode to create a smart module plan view.



● Click One-Click Layout. The power distribution devices, IT cabinets, andsmart cooling products on the cabinet list are automatically arranged in theview. The icons of other registered devices (for example, the access actuator)and devices on the cabinet list need to be manually arranged.

NO TE

– If the locations of devices automatically deployed are inconsistent with their actuallocations, you can manually adjust them.

– The general input unit and power distribution unit support one-click layout onlywhen the versions are the same, ring networking is used, and cables are connectedbased on the standard scenario in the corresponding user manual. If the version ofthe general input unit and power distribution unit is earlier than V306B001D01, amaximum of 20 devices can form a ring network. If the version of the generalinput unit and power distribution unit is V306B001D01 or later, a maximum of 100devices can form a ring network.

NO TE

There may be multiple same device icons on the editing page. If you are unable todetermine the positions of communications devices such as the access actuator, generalinput unit, and power distribution unit, use the following methods to identify them:

● Press the BLINK button on a device for less than 1s to report the blinking status to theECC800-Pro. The corresponding device icon in the WebUI plan view blinks.

● Drag a device in the WebUI plan view. The RUN indicator on the corresponding deviceblinks intermittently at super short intervals.

If both room-level and smart module access actuators exist, modify the value of DeviceName to distinguish them.

The value of Device Name for the power distribution unit should be consistent with itslabel, for example, NMW A 01.

Step 3 Press the BLINK button on a device such as a smart ETH gateway for less than 1sto report the blinking status to the ECC800-Pro. The corresponding device icon inthe WebUI plan view blinks. Check that the device positions and types in the planview are consistent with the actual situation by delivering the blinking command.

NO TE

● If a room-level access control device and camera exist, drag them to the equipmentroom view.

● You can click the camera icon in the view to display the camera web page.

Figure 8-7 Example plan view without room monitoring



Figure 8-8 Example plan view with room monitoring

----End

Follow-up Procedure

To modify the smart module plan view, perform the following steps:

1. Choose Home > Plan View.2. Click Modify Device in Smart Module View. The Devices is displayed.3. Drag registered devices (for example, the camera) to the appropriate

positions in the layout diagram and click Exit Edit Mode. The smart moduleplan view is updated.

4. When editing the smart module view, click Zoom In or Restore to adjustthe size of the view.

8.1.7 How Can I Set and Add Devices?

8.1.7.1 How Can I Set Integrated UPS Parameters (Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on theintegrated UPS, and the other end has been connected to the PoE port on thesmart ETH gateway.

Procedure

Step 1 Start the integrated UPS, and tap System Info on the LCD.

Step 2 Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password

000001, and tap . In the displayed dialog box for confirming thepassword, tap Confirm.

NO TE

If you enter incorrect passwords for five consecutive times, you will be locked out for 5minutes.



Step 3 Choose Settings > Communication, and set IP address assign toAutomatic(DHCP).

Step 4 Tap to go back to the main menu screen.

NO TE

After setting parameters for the integrated UPS, the ECC800-Pro discovers the access fromthe integrated UPS automatically.

----End

8.1.7.2 How Can I Set and Add a UPS2000G-A (Modbus-RTU)?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM_1 orCOM_2 port on the Modbus expansion card of the UPS2000G-A, and the otherend has been connected to the COM port on the ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the UPS2000G-A.

● Set monitoring parameters for UPS2000G-A-(1 kVA–3 kVA).

NO TE

Operate the DIP switch SW1 on the optional Modbus card to set the UPS2000G-A deviceaddress. Toggle switches 1 to 8 of DIP switch SW1 specify the device address in binarymode. ON indicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.


DeviceAddress

ToggleSwitch 1

ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6

ToggleSwitch 7

ToggleSwitch 8

1 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

2 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF

● Set monitoring parameters for UPS2000G-A-(6 kVA–20 kVA).

NO TE

Operate the DIP switch S2 on the optional Modbus card to set the UPS2000G-A deviceaddress. Toggle switches 1 to 8 of DIP switch S2 specify the device address in binary mode.ON indicates 0, and OFF indicates 1.




DeviceAddress

ToggleSwitch 1

ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6

ToggleSwitch 7

ToggleSwitch 8

1 OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON

2 ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON

3 OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON

4 ON ON OFF ON ON ON ON ON

Step 2 Add a UPS2000G-A.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a UPS2000G-A.

Table 8-3 Adding a UPS2000G-A


ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. Theparametersfor addingdevices aredisplayed.

Deviceattribute

Select UPS from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select UPS2000G-A from the drop-downlist box.

Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down listbox.

Communications Port


The setting example indicates that theUPS2000G-A is connected to the COM2 port onthe ECC800-Pro. If the UPS2000G-A isconnected to another port, enter the number ofthe connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the UPS2000G-A based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the UPS2000G-A connects to the

ECC800-Pro properly.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are

displayed in the Number of connected devices list.– If the connection fails, check whether the UPS2000G is properly

connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the UPS2000G and ECC800-Proare running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistentwith the UPS2000G parameters.



NO TE

The section describes how to add a UPS2000G-A in a single UPS scenario. In a parallel UPSscenario, if the common communications address of the Modbus card is added to theECC800-Pro, all UPS2000G-As can be connected to the ECC800-Pro.

----End

8.1.7.3 How Can I Set and Add a UPS5000 (Modbus-RTU)?

Prerequisites● One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port

on the UPS5000 monitoring module, and the other end has been connectedto the COM port on the ETH converter.

● When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one andensure that the view is consistent with the real object. If all devices have beenadded and powered on, only the BLINK function of the ETH converter can beused to identify the mapping between the UPS5000 and ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the UPS5000 monitoring parameters.1. On the displayed screen after UPS5000 startup, tap System Info.2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password

000001, and tap .3. Tap Comm. Settings > RS485 Settings. On the RS485 communication

settings screen, set Address based on the actual plan and set Baud rate to9600.

Step 2 Add a UPS5000.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a UPS5000.

Table 8-4 Adding a UPS5000



Deviceattribute

Select UPS from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select UPS5000 from the drop-down listbox.

Connect To Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list box.

Communications Port

Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-downlist box.




DeviceAddress

Enter the actual communication address ofthe UPS5000.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the UPS5000 is properly connected to

the ECC800-Pro.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are



4. Choose Monitoring > System > ETH Converter Group > ETH Converter n >Running Parameters and set Device name to ETH Converter n_Devicename.

----End

8.1.7.4 How Can I Set and Add a UPS5000 (Modbus-TCP)?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on theUPS5000 and the other end has been connected to the PoE port on the smart ETHgateway.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the UPS5000 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the UPS5000 home screen and tap System Info.2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password

000001, and tap .3. Tap Comm. Settings and choose IP Settings. Set IP address allocation to

Automatic (DHCP) on the displayed communication settings screen and theUPS5000 is discovered by ECC800-Pro automatically and is connected to theECC800-Pro.

NO TE

On the ModbusTCP Settings screen, set ModbusTCP encryption to Enable.

----End



8.1.7.5 How Can I Set and Add a PDU8000 or Integrated PDU (over Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on thePDU8000 or integrated PDU, and the other end has been connected to the PoEport on the smart ETH gateway.

Context

The method of connecting the PDU8000 to the ECC800-Pro is the same as that forthe integrated PDU. Connecting the integrated PDU to the ECC800-Pro byfollowing the instructions in this section.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the PDU8000 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the PDU8000 home screen, tap System Info.2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password

000001, and tap .3. Tap Communication to set IP address assign to Automatic(DHCP) on the

displayed communication settings screen and the PDU8000 is discovered byECC800-Pro automatically and is connected to the ECC800-Pro.

NO TE

– On the Communication screen, set SSL to Enable.

– If the PDU is a modular precision PDU, set modbusTCPcertification to Disable onthe Communication screen.

----End

8.1.7.6 How Can I Set and Add an Envicool Air Conditioner (Modbus-RTU)?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to terminals 1 and 2on the air conditioner electric control box, and the other end has been connectedto the COM/AIDI port on the ECC800-Pro collector or UIM20A.

(Optional) One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to terminals7 and 8 on the air conditioner electric control box, and the other end has beenconnected to the COM/AIDI port on the ECC800-Pro collector or UIM20A.

NO TE

● Terminals 1 and 2 of the air conditioner electric control box are RS485+ and RS485–,respectively. Terminals 7 and 8 are Boolean dry contacts, which are polarity insensitive.

● Cables need to be connected to both the Envicool CRU and IFX terminal.



Procedure

Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the air conditioner.1. On the home screen of the air conditioner, click SetPoint, enter the password

8866, and click OK.2. On the air conditioner parameter setting page, set MonAddr to 1.

Step 2 Add an Envicool air conditioner (Modbus-RTU).1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add an Envicool air conditioner.

Table 8-5 Adding an Envicool CRU


ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice.

Deviceattribute

Select Air Conditioner from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select ENVICOOL-CRU from the drop-down list box.

Connect To Select ECC800 from the drop-down listbox.NOTE

If the other end of the straight-through cable isconnected to the COM port on the UIM20A,select UIM.

Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the EnvicoolCRU is connected to the COM1 port on theECC800-Pro. If the Envicool CRU is connected toanother port, enter the number of theconnected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the air conditioner based onthe actual situation.

Table 8-6 Adding an Envicool IFX terminal



Deviceattribute


Device Type Select Envicool-IFX Terminal from thedrop-down list.






Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the EnvicoolIFX terminal is connected to the COM2 port onthe ECC800-Pro. If the Envicool IFX terminal isconnected to another port, enter the number ofthe connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the air conditioner based onthe actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the Envicool air conditioner is properly

connected to the ECC800-Pro.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are



----End

8.1.7.7 How Can I Set and Add a DC PDF (Modbus-RTU)?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485/RS232port on the power distribution monitoring unit in the DC PDF, and the other endhas been connected to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro collector or UIM20A.

Procedure

Step 1 Add a DC PDF (Modbus-RTU).1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a DC PDF.



Table 8-7 Adding a DC PDF



Deviceattribute


Device Type Select TP48202BDCEndCabinet from thedrop-down list box.



Communications Port


The setting example indicates that theTP48202B DC end cabinet is connected to theCOM1 port on the ECC800-Pro. If the cabinet isconnected to another port, enter the number ofthe connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to160. During actual configuration, set thedevice address for the DC PDF based onthe actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the DC PDF is properly connected to the

ECC800-Pro.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are



----End

8.1.7.8 How Can I Set and Add a PDU8000 (Modbus RTU)? (C41)

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port onthe PDU8000, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on theECC800-Pro collector or ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the PDU8000 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the PDU8000 home screen and tap System Info.



2. Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name admin and password

000001, and tap . In the displayed dialog box for confirming thepassword, tap Confirm.

3. Tap Communication to access the PDU8000 communication settings screenand set IP address assign to Manual. Set Serial port baud rate to 9600, andSerial port address to 1.

Figure 8-9 PDU8000 communication settings screen

Step 2 Add a PDU8000 (Modbus-RTU).


2. Add a PDU8000.




Deviceattribute


Device Type Select PDU8000 from the drop-down listbox.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that thePDU8000 is connected to the COM1 port on theECC800-Pro. If the PDU8000 is connected toanother port, enter the number of theconnected port.




DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the PDU8000 based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDU8000 is properly connected to

the ECC800-Pro.– If the connection succeeds, click Confirm. The connected devices are



----End

8.1.7.9 How Do I Set and Add an rPDU?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM, SER, orRS485 port on the rPDU, and the other end has been connected to the COM porton the ECC800-Pro collector, UIM20A expansion module, or ETH converter.

Context

Table 8-9 rPDU basic information

Model Vendor Name Displayedon the WebUI

Eleventh andTwelfthCharacters inDevice Barcodea

PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1/CLEVER

Clever PDU2000-M(C) FT

PDU2000-32-1PH-20/4-M1/HPX

HPXIN PDU2000-M(H) 6B

MD-1324-2004 Clever rPDU-MPDU FT

PN1-32I10-20E4G-AV4

HPXIN rPDU-PN 6B

ZFIF-112-0800 Clever rPDU FT

PN1-16X18-8E-AH4W

HPXIN 6B

ZZIF-130-2004 Clever FT



Model Vendor Name Displayedon the WebUI

Eleventh andTwelfthCharacters inDevice Barcodea

PN1-32I15-20E4G-AV4W

HPXIN 6B

a: The barcode starts with 21 and is attached to the device.

The PDU2000-M(C) and PDU2000-M(H) are used as examples.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the PDU2000 monitoring parameters.● Set the PDU2000-M (C) monitoring parameters.

NO TE


– After the PDU2000-M (C) is powered on, the LCM displays theinitialization screen.

Figure 8-10 PDU2000-M (C) initialization screen

– Press MENU to enter the device communications address screen.

Figure 8-11 PDU2000-M (C) communications settings

– Press the DOWN and UP buttons to select the address to be set.– Press MENU to confirm the settings.



NO TE

The parameter settings take effect only if you press MENU and then thePDU2000-M (C) buzzes and restarts. If you do not press MENU, the PDU2000-M(C) buzzes and restarts automatically after 30s and the settings are not saved.

● Set the PDU2000-M (H) monitoring parameters.

NO TE


– After the PDU2000-M (H) is powered on, press MENU. The LCM displays

.– Press MENU again to access the device communications address screen.

Figure 8-12 PDU2000-M (H) communications settings

– Press DOWN and UP to select the address to be set.– Press MENU to confirm the settings.

NO TE

If modification is successful, is displayed: If modification fails,

is displayed:

Step 2 Add a PDU2000.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a PDU2000.



ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. Theparametersfor adding

Deviceattribute


Device Type Select PDU2000-M (C) or PDU2000-M(H) from the drop-down list box based onthe actual device.





devices aredisplayed.

Communications Port


The setting example indicates that thePDU2000 is connected to the COM1 port on theECC800-Pro. If the PDU2000 is connected toanother port, enter the number of theconnected port.

DeviceAddress

Enter the actual device address of thePDU2000.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDU2000 is properly connected tothe ECC800-Pro.


– If the connection fails, check whether the device is properly connected tothe ECC800-Pro, whether the device and ECC800-Pro are runningproperly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with thedevice parameters.

----End

8.1.7.10 How Can I Set and Add an ATS?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM port onthe ATS, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro collector or ETH converter.

Context

The ATS (ABB) model is OMD800.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the ATS device address. On the ATS display panel, tap , choose DeviceConfiguration > Modbus and set the device address.

NO TE

● The ATS device address is 1 by default.

● The initial password is 0001 for the ATS display panel.

Step 2 Add an ATS.


2. Add an ATS.



Table 8-11 Adding an ATS



Deviceattribute

Select ATS from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select ATS from the drop-down list box.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the ATSconnects to the COM1 port on the ECC800-Pro.If the ATS connects to another port, enter thenumber of the connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the ATS based on the actualsituation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the ATS is properly connected to theECC800-Pro.



----End

8.1.7.11 How Do I Set and Add a PMAC615 AC Meter?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port onthe PMAC615 AC meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM porton the ECC800-Pro.

Context

The model of the single-phase AC meter for the lighting control box is PMAC615.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the PMAC615 communications address.



1. After the PMAC615 is started, press on the displayed screen and the

configuration screen is displayed. Press until the ID prompt is displayed,indicating the communications address setting screen.

2. Press and a blinking cursor is displayed. Press to modify the

communications address based on site requirements. Then press toconfirm the address setting.

Figure 8-13 PMAC615 communications address

Step 2 Add a PMAC615.


2. Add a PMAC615.

Table 8-12 Adding a PMAC615



Deviceattribute

Select Electricity Meter from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select PMAC615 from the drop-down listbox.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that thePMAC615 is connected to the COM3 port onthe ECC800-Pro. If the PMAC615 is connected toanother port, enter the number of theconnected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 8.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the PMAC615 based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PMAC615 is properly connected tothe ECC800-Pro.





----End

8.1.7.12 How Do I Set and Add a PMAC625 AC Meter?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port onthe PMAC625 AC meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM porton the ECC800-Pro.

Context● The model of the three-phase AC power meter for the PDC is PMAC625.● When connecting devices, you are advised to add devices one by one. If all

devices have been added and powered on, only the BLINK function of the ETHconverter can be used to identify the mapping between the PMAC625 andETH converter.

ProcedureStep 1 Set the PMAC625 communications address.

1. Press on the displayed screen after the PMAC625 is started. Press after entering the programming mode. Modify the password (1 by default) in

blinking ones digit by pressing or , and press to confirm thesetting.

Figure 8-14 Programming screen of the PMAC625

2. Enter the communications address setting screen by pressing or ,

and press to confirm the setting.3. Select the place of the communications address value to be modified by

pressing or , modify the communications address value (ranging

from 1 to 247) by pressing or , and then press to save thesetting.



Figure 8-15 Communications address of the PMAC625

Step 2 Add a PMAC625.


2. Add a PMAC625.

Table 8-13 Adding a PMAC625



Deviceattribute


Device Type Select PMAC625 from the drop-down listbox.

Connect To Select ETH Converter n from the drop-down list box.

Communications Port

Select COM1/COM2 from the drop-downlist box.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to100. During actual configuration, set thedevice address for the PMAC625 based onthe actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PMAC625 connects to the ECC800-Pro properly.

– If the PMAC625 connects to the ECC800-Pro successfully, click Confirm.The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connecteddevices list.

– If the connection fails, check whether the PMAC625 is properly connectedto the ECC800-Pro, whether the PMAC625 and ECC800-Pro are runningproperly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with thePMAC625 parameters.


----End



8.1.7.13 How Can I Set and Add a PDC DC Meter?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485 port onthe PDC DC meter, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on theECC800-Pro.

Context

The model of the PDC is PDU8000-0630DCV5-HVA002 and the BOM number is02403121.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the communications address for the PDC DC meter.

1. Tap Settings on the screen after the PDC DC meter is started.

2. Enter 1 in the displayed password dialog box, tap Enter, and then tapConfirm to enter the setting screen.

3. Set the communications address. Tap the ID under Device ID on the displayedsetting screen, enter 2 (the actual value prevails) using the keyboard thatpops up, and then tap Enter.

4. Press the restart button at the rear of the monitoring screen. Then theparameters take effect.

NO TE

The communications address is 1 by default.

Step 2 Add a PDC DC meter.


2. Add a PDC DC meter.

Table 8-14 Adding a PDC DC meter



Deviceattribute


Device Type Select LF DC Meter from the drop-down listbox.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the DC meteris connected to the COM2 port on the ECC800-Pro. If the DC meter is connected to another port,enter the number of the connected port.




DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the PDC DC meter based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the PDC DC meter connects to the

ECC800-Pro properly.– If the PDC DC meter connects to the ECC800-Pro successfully, click

Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in the Number ofconnected devices list.

– If the connection fails, check whether the PDC DC meter is properlyconnected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the PDC DC meter and ECC800-Pro are running properly, and whether the parameter settings areconsistent with the PDC DC meter parameters.

----End

8.1.7.14 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-A011/A025/A035/A042/A050(Modbus-TCP)?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE_1 port on theNetCol5000-A011/A025/A035/A042/A050 main control board, and the other endhas been connected to the PoE port on the ETH converter.

ContextThe following describes how to set and add a NetCol5000-A042.

Procedure

Step 1 Set NetCol5000-A042 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the NetCol5000-A042 home page, click Settings, choose the user name

admin, and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of theNetCol5000-A042 is displayed.

2. Choose Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic(DHCP), and click Submit.

3. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, and set Connectionmode to Server and client, Server encryption to Enable.

NO TE

After the NetCol5000-A042 parameters are set, the ECC800-Pro can automatically identifythe automatic access of the NetCol5000-A042.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-A042 onthe WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.



2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0421.

NO TE

1 in NetCol5000-A0421 is variable and subject to change with the smart coolingproduct model and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters

(such as on/off control parameters).

CA UTION

After the smart cooling product is shut down, the temperature of the smartmodule increases and data running is affected. Exercise caution whenperforming this operation.

----End

8.1.7.15 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-A025 (Modbus-MAC)?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE_1 port on theNetCol5000-A025 main control board, and the other end has been connected tothe PoE port on the ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set NetCol5000-A025 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the NetCol5000-A025 home page, click Settings, choose the user name

admin, and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of theNetCol5000-A025 is displayed.

2. Choose Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode to Automatic(DHCP), and click Submit.


NO TE

After the NetCol5000-A025 parameters are set, the ECC800-Pro can automatically identifythe automatic access of the NetCol5000-A025.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the 25 kW smart coolingproduct on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-A0251.

NO TE

– 1 in NetCol5000-A0251 is variable and subject to change with the smart coolingproduct model and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.



3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set running parameters.4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters

(such as on/off control parameters).

CA UTION


----End

8.1.7.16 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-C(030, 032)/NetCol5000-C(065, 080) Parameters (over Modbus TCP)?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the FE port on theNetCol5000-C(030, 032) or the NetCol5000-C(065, 080) main control board, andthe other end has been connected to the POE port on the ETH converter.

ContextThe following describes how to set and add a NetCol5000-C(030, 032).

Procedure

Step 1 Set NetCol5000-C(030, 032) monitoring parameters.1. Enter the NetCol5000-C(030, 032) home page, click Settings, choose user

name admin and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen ofthe NetCol5000-C(030, 032) is displayed.

2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > IP Settings, set IP assigning mode toAutomatic(DHCP), and tap Submit.


NO TE

● After setting parameters for the NetCol5000-C(030, 032), the ECC800-Pro discovers theaccess from the smart cooling product automatically.

● The earlier version has Protocol setting on the screen. The actual screen prevails.

Step 2 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-C(030,032) on the WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-C0301.

NO TE

1 in NetCol5000-C0301 is variable and subject to change with the smart coolingproduct model and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.



3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product runningparameters.

4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters(such as on/off control parameters).

CA UTION


----End

8.1.7.17 How Can I Set and Add a NetCol5000-C030 (Modbus RTU)?

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the J73communications port on the NetCol5000-C030 main control board, and the otherend has been connected to the COM port on the ECC800-Pro collector or ETHconverter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set NetCol5000-C030 monitoring parameters.1. Enter the NetCol5000-C030 home page, click Settings, choose the user name

Admin and enter password 000001. After login, the settings screen of theNetCol5000-C030 is displayed.

2. Choose Settings > Comm Settings > Modbus Settings, choose Baud rate to9600 and set Comm address to 1.

NO TE

The earlier version has Protocol setting on the screen. The actual screen prevails.

Step 2 Add a NetCol5000-C030.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a NetCol5000-C030.

Table 8-15 Adding a NetCol5000-C030


ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. The

Deviceattribute


Device Type Select NetCol5000-C from the drop-downlist box.





parametersfor addingdevices aredisplayed.

Communications Port


The setting example indicates that theNetCol5000-C is connected to the COM1 porton the ECC800-Pro. If the NetCol5000-C isconnected to another port, enter the number ofthe connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the NetCol5000-C based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the NetCol5000-C030 connects to the

ECC800-Pro properly.– If the NetCol5000-C030 connects to the ECC800-Pro successfully, click

Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in the Number ofconnected devices list.

– If the connection fails, check whether the NetCol5000-C030 is properlyconnected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the NetCol5000-C030 andECC800-Pro are running properly, and whether the parameter settings areconsistent with the NetCol5000-C030 parameters.

Step 3 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the NetCol5000-C030 onthe WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Cooling > NetCol5000-C0301.

NO TE

1 in NetCol5000-C0301 is variable and subject to change with the smart coolingproduct model and connection sequence. The displayed value prevails.

3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set smart cooling product runningparameters.

4. On the Controls tab page, set the smart cooling product control parameters(such as on/off control parameters).

CA UTION


----End



8.1.7.18 How Can I Set and Add an IP Device?

Prerequisites● An IP device is connected to the ECC800-Pro over a switch. The device and

ECC800-Pro have been powered on.● You have obtained the IP address of the IP device.

Context● IP devices, such as ATMs, are devices with IP attributes in equipment room or

site. By adding an IP device, you connect the device to the ECC800-Pro in thesame network so that the ECC800-Pro monitors the device status. If the IPdevice is offline, the ECC800-Pro will report a disconnection alarm on itsWebUI.

NO TE

In the LAN scenario, the IP devices and the ECC800-Pro must be in the same network.

● Following is a procedure example about how to add five IP devices with theonline detection timeout interval being 29 seconds.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters.

Step 3 Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, on the IP Device Detection Parameters tabpage, set Online detection timeout interval to 29. The value range is 10 to 60seconds. Click Submit.

NO TE

Online detection timeout interval is 30 by default, which means that the ECC800-Prodetermines that the communication with the device is interrupted if the device has noresponse within 30 seconds.

Step 4 Set IP device num to 5. The value range is 0 to 100.

Step 5 Click Submit. The IP Device 1-5 tab page is displayed.

Step 6 On the IP Device 1-5 tab page, set Enable online detection IP device 1 toEnable.


Step 8 Specify IP device 1 address.

NO TE

● Set IP device 1 address to the IP address of IP device 1. For example, set IP device 1address to 192.168.2.137.

● Add other IP devices in the same way.


Step 10 (Optional) If you need to change the name of an IP device, perform the followingsteps:




2. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.3. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of IP device 1 to XXX

and click Submit.

----End

8.1.7.19 How Can I Set and Add an Independent Deployment AI_DI Unit?

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the COM_IN port onthe independent deployment AI_DI unit, and the other end has been connected tothe COM port on the ECC800-Pro collector or ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set monitoring parameters for the independent deployment AI_DI unit.

Set the address of the independent deployment AI_DI unit to 1 or 2 by setting itsDIP switch.

The DIP switch consists of toggle switches 1–4 (from left to right). Toggle switches1–3 specify the address of the independent deployment AI_DI unit. Toggle switch 4specifies the address of the RS485 build-out resistor. 1 indicates ON, and 0indicates OFF.

NO TE

The device address for the independent deployment AI_DI unit can only be set to 1 or 2.


Address Toggle Switch 1 Toggle Switch 2 Toggle Switch 3

1 OFF ON ON

2 ON OFF ON

NO TE

If the signal quality is poor due to signal reflection caused by long communications cables(longer than 50 m), set toggle switch 4 to ON for the furthest independent deployment AI_DIunit. After the DIP switch settings are modified, power off and restart the independentdeployment AI_DI unit for the new settings to take effect.

Step 2 Add an independent deployment AI_DI unit.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add an independent deployment AI_DI unit.



Table 8-17 Adding an independent deployment AI_DI unit



Deviceattribute

Select Independent Deployment AI_DIUnit from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select Independent Deployment AI_DIUnit from the drop-down list box.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that theindependent deployment AI_DI unit is connectedto the COM3 port on the ECC800-Pro. If theindependent deployment AI_DI unit is connectedto another port, set the COM port to the ECC800-Pro port connected to the independentdeployment AI_DI unit.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the independent deploymentAI_DI unit based on the actual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the independent deployment AI_DI unit

connects to the ECC800-Pro properly.

a. If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800-Prosuccessfully, click Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in theNumber of connected devices list.

b. If the connection fails, check whether the independent deployment AI_DIunit is properly connected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the independentdeployment AI_DI unit and ECC800-Pro are running properly, andwhether the parameter settings are consistent with the independentdeployment AI_DI unit parameters.

----End

8.1.7.20 How Can I Set and Add a UIM20A Expansion Module (Modbus-TCP)?

PrerequisitesConnect one end of a network cable to the PoE port on the UIM20A expansionmodule and the other end to the LAN port on the ECC800-Pro or the PoE port onthe smart ETH gateway.

NO TE

Cascading of UIM20A expansion modules is not supported.



ContextThe UIM20A expansion module supports self-discovery and does not need to setparameters.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the running parameters and control parameters for the UIM20A expansionmodule on the WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > System > UIM Group > UIMn.3. On the Running Parameters tab page, set UIM20A expansion module

running parameters.4. On the Controls tab page, set the UIM20A expansion module control

parameters.

----End

8.1.7.21 How Can I Set and Add a Multi-functional Sensor?If a multi-functional sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the PoE port on themulti-functional sensor, and the other end has been connected to the PoE port onthe smart ETH converter.

Procedure

Step 1 Set multi-functional sensor parameters.

On the WebUI, choose Monitoring > Aisle > Multi-Func Sensor Group > Multi-Func Sensor1 > Running Parameters, ensure that Smoke enable and Tempenable are set to Enable, set High temperature alarm threshold and otherparameters as required, and then click Submit.

NO TE

If multiple multi-functional sensors are connected, commission one multi-functional sensorfirst and then commission the other multi-functional sensors in the same way.

Step 2 Check the functions of the multi-functional sensor.



Temperature and humiditydetection: View the runninginformation about the multi-functional sensor on theWebUI.

You can view the current ambient temperatureand humidity.




Smoke detection: Simulate asmoky environment.Smoke generation methods:Generate smoke. Place thepaper 5–10 cm away fromthe smoke compartment,and let smoke enter thesmoke compartment throughthe hole in the side of themulti-functional sensor.Smoke dispersing method:Send clean air to the smokecompartment through thehole in the side of the multi-functional sensor.CAUTION

● Do not generate openflame, and ensure thatsmoke does not damageany device.

● When testing the smokedetection function of themulti-functional sensor, donot start the smart coolingproduct or fan, because theair from the smart coolingproduct or fan will interferewith the smoke, andtherefore affect thedetection result.

● After the commissioning iscomplete, clean up dust.

● Start counting time immediately when smokeis entering the hole. After about 30 seconds,the red ALM indicator turns on, and the appor WebUI displays a smoke alarm.

● Some time later after the smoke is dispersed,the red ALM indicator turns off and thesmoke alarm disappears.



Figure 8-16 Detecting smoke

(1) Smoke compartment (2) ALM indicator

----End

8.1.7.22 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DIPort on the ECC800-Pro)?

If a smoke sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites● Connecting Cables to the Smoke Sensor (NC):

The smoke sensor has been connected to the AI/DI port on the ECC800-Procollector using a network cable.Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable, andconnect the network cable to the cable delivered with the smoke sensor. Thefollowing table describes the cable connection.

Table 8-19 Smoke sensor cable connection

Wire of the Network Cable Smoke Sensor Cable

Core wire 1 (orange-white), corewire 8 (brown)

GND (black)

Core wire 3 (green-white) +12 V (red)

Core wire 6 (green) Normally closed end (yellow)

Core wire 7 (brown-white) Common end (green)




None (reserved; no connectionneeded and to be insulated)

Normally open end (blue)

● Connecting Cables to the Smoke Sensor:

One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 1 (orange-white),5 (white-blue) and 8 (brown) have been short-circuited, core wires 6 (green)and 7 (brown-white) have been connected to the cable delivered with thesmoke sensor, and the other end of the network cable has been connected tothe AI/DI port on the ECC800-Pro.

Context● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is

described.

Procedure

Step 1 Set smoke sensor parameters.

NO TE

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_2 port on the ECC800-Pro.


Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to Smoke

and click Submit.5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2

Port Settings.6. Set Smoke sensor to Enable and click Submit.7. Confirm that Smoke sensor type is automatically identified as Smoke sensor

or Smoke sensor(NC).8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.


Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of smoke sensor.




Check Method Normal Connection Status Alarm Clearance Method

Simulate asmokyenvironmentunder the smokesensor.

Smoke DI alarm is displayedon the active alarm page ofthe app or WebUI.

● If Smoke sensor type isSmoke Sensor, power offand reset the smokesensor to clear the alarm.

● If Smoke sensor type isset to SmokeSensor(NC), press thereset button of the smokesensor to clear the alarm.

----End

8.1.7.23 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DIPort on the Skylight Actuator)?


PrerequisitesThe smoke sensor has been connected to the AI/DI port on the skylight actuatorusing a network cable.

To connect the cable for the smoke sensor, perform the following steps:

Short-circuit core wires 1 and 8 on the other end of the network cable, andconnect the network cable to the cable delivered with the smoke sensor. Thefollowing table describes the cable connection.

Table 8-21 Smoke sensor cable connection


Core wire 1 (orange-white), core wire8 (brown)

GND (black)

Core wire 3 (green-white) +12 V (red)

Core wire 6 (green) Normally closed end (yellow)

Core wire 7 (brown-white) Common end (green)

None (reserved; no connection neededand to be insulated)

Normally open end (blue)


described.



Procedure


NO TE

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the skylight actuator.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Aisle > Skylight Actuator Group > Skylight Actuator

1 > Running Parameters > DI1 alarm level.3. Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm or High voltage alarm, and click

Submit.

NO TE

– Set DI1 alarm level to Low voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected overNO.

– Set DI1 alarm level to High voltage alarm if the smoke sensor is connected overNC.





DI1_smoke alarm isdisplayed on the activealarm page of the app orWebUI.

Press the reset button on thesmoke sensor to clear thealarm.

----End

8.1.7.24 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DIPort on the Rack Environment Unit)?


Prerequisites

One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 1, 5 and 8 have beenshort-circuited, core wires 6 and 7 have been connected to the cable deliveredwith the smoke sensor, and the other end of the network cable has beenconnected to the AI/DI port on the rack environment unit.


described.



Procedure


NO TE

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the rack environmentunit.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > Cabinet > IT Cabinet n > Cabinet Collector n >

Running Parameters.3. In AI/DI_1 Port Settings area, set AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, and click

Submit.4. Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Smoke sensor, and click Submit.





Smoke sensor status(AI/DI_1) is displayed on theactive alarm page of the appor WebUI.

If Smoke sensor type isSmoke Sensor, power offand reset the smoke sensorto clear the alarm.

----End

8.1.7.25 How Can I Set and Add the Smoke Sensor (Connected to the AI/DIPort on the UIM20A expansion module)?


Prerequisites

One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 1, 5, and 8 have beenshort-circuited, core wires 6 and 7 have been connected to the cable deliveredwith the smoke sensor, and the other end of the network cable has beenconnected to the AI/DI port on the UIM20A expansion module.


described.

Procedure




NO TE

In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the UIM20Aexpansion module.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > System > UIM Group> UIM n > Running Parameters.3. In AI/DI_1 Port Settings area, set AI/DI_1 sensor to Enable, click Submit.4. Set AI/DI_1 sensor type to Smoke sensor, click Submit.





Smoke sensor status(AI/DI_1) is displayed on theactive alarm page of the appor WebUI.

If Smoke sensor type isSmoke Sensor, power offand reset the smoke sensorto clear the alarm.

----End

8.1.7.26 How Can I Set and Add the WLDS900 Water Sensor?If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on theWLDS900 water sensor, and the other end has been connected to the AI/DI porton the ECC800-Pro.


sensor. The specific alarm then can be reported.● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is

described.

Procedure

Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.

NO TE

● In this example, the water sensor is connected to the AI/DI_1 port on the ECC800-Pro.

● The default alarm severity of the AI/DI port is Minor. If you want to change the alarmseverity, see How Should I Configure Alarm Parameters.





3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_1 to Leak

and click Submit.5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_1

Port Settings.6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.7. Confirm that Leak sensor type is automatically identified as Leak

sensor(Rope).8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.

Ensure that III power supply enable(AIDI_1/DO) is Yes.

Step 2 Check functions of water sensors.



Alarm ClearanceMethod

Immerse the waterdetection cable in water.

Leak DI alarm isgenerated on the activealarm screen of the appor on the WebUI.

Wipe dry the waterdetection cable. Thealarm disappearsautomatically.

----End

8.1.7.27 How Can I Set and Add a WLDS600 Water Sensor?If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on theWLDS600 water sensor, and the other end has been connected to the energizedCOM port on the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure

Step 1 The default communications address 1 of the water sensor is used for connectingto the ECC800-Pro.


Step 3 Add the water sensor.



Table 8-26 Adding the water sensor


ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. Theparameters foradding devicesare displayed.

Deviceattribute

Select Sensor from the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select Water Sensor from the drop-down listbox.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the watersensor is connected to the COM1 port on theECC800-Pro. If the water sensor is connected toanother port, enter the number of the connectedport.

Device Address In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the water sensor based on theactual situation.

Step 4 Click Test Connect to check whether the water sensor connects to the ECC800-Proproperly.● If the water sensor connects to the ECC800-Pro successfully, click Confirm.

The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connected deviceslist.

● If the connection fails, check whether the water sensor is properly connectedto the ECC800-Pro, whether the water sensor and ECC800-Pro are runningproperly, and whether the parameter settings are consistent with the watersensor parameters.

Step 5 Set water sensor parameters.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Monitoring > System > Water Sensor > Running Parameters.3. Set the parameters based on actual conditions, and click Submit.






Immerse thewater detectioncable in water.

● Choose Monitoring >System > Water Sensor >Running Info. Check thatLeakage status is Alarmand Distance from theleakage point is greaterthan or equal to 0 m.

● Choose Home > ActiveAlarms. Check that awater sensor alarm isgenerated.

Wipe dry the water detectioncable. The alarm disappearsautomatically.

----End

8.1.7.28 How Can I Set and Add an Electrode Water Sensor?

If a water sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites

One end of the network cable has been stripped, core wires 7 and 8 have beenconnected to the cable delivered with the electrode water sensor, and the otherend of the network cable has been connected to the AI/DI port on the rackenvironment unit.


sensor. The specific alarm then can be reported.● If the sensor is prefabricated, only check its settings.● The actual value prevails. Only the method of the parameter settings is

described.

Procedure

Step 1 Set water sensor parameters.

NO TE

In this example, the water sensor is connected to the AI/DI_5 port on the ECC800-Pro.


Configuration page is displayed.3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_5 to Leak

and click Submit.




6. Set Leak sensor to Enable and click Submit.7. Confirm that Leak sensor type is automatically identified as Leak

sensor(Electroc).8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, and click Power Supply Parameters.

Ensure that II power supply enable(AIDI_3/COM2/AIDI_5) is Yes.




Immerse the twocontacts of theelectrode watersensor in water.

Leak DI alarm is generatedon the active alarm screen ofthe app or on the WebUI.

Wipe dry the two contacts ofthe water sensor. The alarmdisappears automatically.

----End

8.1.7.29 How Can I Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to theAI/DI Port on the ECC800-Pro)?

If a temperature sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on thetemperature sensor, and the other end has been connected to the AI/DI port onthe ECC800-Pro.


described.● If multiple temperature sensors are connected, commission them one by one.

Procedure

Step 1 Set temperature sensor parameters.

NO TE

In this example, the temperature sensor is connected to the AI/DI_2 port on the ECC800-Pro.


Configuration page is displayed.



3. Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.4. On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_2 to

Temperature and click Submit.5. Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_2

Port Settings.6. Set Temperature sensor to Enable and click Submit.7. Confirm that Temperature sensor type is automatically identified as NTC.

Ensure that Temperature power supply is Yes.8. Click Unhide All Advanced Signals, then click Power Supply Parameters.


Step 2 Check the monitoring functions of the temperature sensor.



View the operatinginformation about thetemperature sensor on theWebUI.

You can view the current cabinet temperature.

----End

8.1.7.30 How Can I Set and Add the Temperature Sensor (Connected to theNTC Port on the Rack Environment Unit)?


Prerequisites

One end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RJ45 port on thetemperature sensor, and the other end has been connected to the NTC port on therack environment unit.

Procedure

Step 1 The temperature sensor supports self-discovery and does not need to setparameters.




Path: Monitoring > Cabinet> IT Cabinet n > CabinetCollector n




----End

8.1.7.31 How Can I Commission a Temperature Sensor (Connected to theNTC Port on the T/H Sensor)?


Prerequisites

Cables have been connected to the NTC, T/H sensor, and UIM20A expansionmodule.

Figure 8-17 Wiring diagram

(1) UIM20A expansion module (2) T/H sensor (3) NTC sensor

Procedure

Step 1 The NTC port on the T/H sensor connected to the temperature sensor supportsautomatic identification. Therefore, you do not need to set parameters.

Step 2 Add the T/H sensor.


2. Add the T/H sensor.

Choose System Settings > Device Management and click Auto DiscoverDevice to add the T/H sensor. The device connection information is displayed.







Path: Monitoring >Cabinet> IT Cabinet n > T/Hsensor n


----End

8.1.7.32 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 33010516)?If a T/H sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.

PrerequisitesOne end of the straight-through cable has been connected to the RS485_IN porton the T/H sensor, and the other end has been connected to the COM port on theECC800-Pro or the UIM20A expansion module.

ContextThis section describes how to set and add a T/H sensor by using the COM port onthe ECC800-Pro as an example.

Procedure

Step 1 Set the T/H sensor device address.





ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6







Step 2 Add a T/H sensor.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add a T/H sensor.

Table 8-33 Adding a T/H sensor



Deviceattribute


Device Type Select T/H sensor from the drop-down listbox.


Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the T/H sensoris connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800-Pro. If the T/H sensor is connected to anotherport, enter the number of the connected port.

DeviceAddress

In this example, Device Address is set to 1.During actual configuration, set the deviceaddress for the T/H sensor based on theactual situation.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800-

Pro properly.– If the T/H sensor connects to the ECC800-Pro successfully, click Confirm.

The connected devices are displayed in the Number of connecteddevices list.

– If the connection fails, check whether the T/H sensor is properlyconnected to the ECC800-Pro, whether the T/H sensor and ECC800-Proare running properly, and whether the parameter settings are consistentwith the T/H sensor parameters.




Check the runninginformation about the T/Hsensor on the WebUI.

Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check thecurrent T/H information of the cabinet.





Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and setHigh temperature alarm threshold, Lowtemperature alarm threshold, High humidityalarm threshold, Low humidity alarmthreshold, NTC1-6 high temperature alarmthreshold and NTC1-6 low temperature alarmthreshold as required.NOTE

The default values of High temperature alarmthreshold, Low temperature alarm threshold, Highhumidity alarm threshold, and Low humidity alarmthreshold are 30.0°C, 5.0°C, 85.0% RH and 15.0% RHrespectively.

----End

8.1.7.33 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02310NBS)?If a T/H sensor is installed, perform the following steps to configure it.



Procedure






ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6







ToggleSwitch 2

ToggleSwitch 3

ToggleSwitch 4

ToggleSwitch 5

ToggleSwitch 6






Deviceattribute




Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the T/H sensoris connected to the COM3 port on the ECC800-Pro. If the T/H sensor is connected to anotherport, enter the number of the connected port.

DeviceAddress










Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check thecurrent T/H information of the cabinet.





Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and setHigh temperature alarm threshold, Lowtemperature alarm threshold, High humidityalarm threshold and Low humidity alarmthreshold as required.NOTE

The default values of High temperature alarmthreshold, Low temperature alarm threshold, Highhumidity alarm threshold, and Low humidity alarmthreshold are 30.0°C, 5.0°C, 85.0% RH and 15.0% RHrespectively.

----End

8.1.7.34 How Can I Set and Add a T/H Sensor (BOM Number: 02311FQG/02312PBL)?



Procedure



Toggle switches 1–6 are used to set device addresses, toggle switch 7 is reserved,and toggle switch 8 is used to switch the temperature unit.

Device addresses are set in binary encoding format in the range of 1–63. The firstbit is the least significant bit, and the sixth bit is the most significant bit. ONindicates 1, and OFF indicates 0.



Figure 8-19 T/H sensor DIP switch




ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagement and clickAdd Device.Theparametersfor addingdevices aredisplayed.

Deviceattribute




Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the T/Hsensor is connected to the COM3 port on theECC800-Pro. If the T/H sensor is connected toanother port, enter the number of the connectedport.

DeviceAddress












Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Info, and check thecurrent T/H and NTC information of the cabinet.


Choose Monitoring > Aisle > T/H Sensor Group> T/H Sensorn > Running Parameters, and setHigh temperature alarm threshold, Lowtemperature alarm threshold, High humidityalarm threshold, Low humidity alarmthreshold, NTC1-6 high temperature alarmthreshold and NTC1-6 low temperature alarmthreshold as required.NOTE

The default values of High temperature alarmthreshold, Low temperature alarm threshold, Highhumidity alarm threshold, Low humidity alarmthreshold, NTC1-6 high temperature alarmthreshold and NTC1-6 low temperature alarmthreshold are 30.0°C, 5.0°C, 85.0% RH, 15.0% RH,45°C and 10°C respectively.

----End

8.1.8 How Can I Restore Factory Settings?

Context

NO TICE

Restoring factory settings will restore parameters to their default values. Back updata before performing this operation. Perform this operation with caution.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File and click Restore Factory Settings.

Step 3 Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and click Submit.

----End



8.1.9 How Can I Install a Network Security Certificate?

Context● You have copied a network security certificate and its key you obtained to the

PC.● Install a network security certificate if a security certificate problem message

is displayed when you attempt to log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.● You need to apply to an organization authorized by the customer for a

network security certificate and its key with the ECC800-Pro IP address ordomain name. This section describes how to import the certificate and key.

Procedure


Step 2 Upload a network security certificate.1. Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Site Configuration.2. Select a certificate format from the drop-down list box in the Network

Security Certificate area.3. Click Select File on the right of Select a network security certificate.4. Select the network security certificate to be imported from the PC and click

Upload.5. Click Select File on the right of Select a network security certificate key.6. Select the network security certificate key to be imported from the PC and

click Upload.7. (Optional) If the network security certificate is encrypted, select If an

encrypted private key is imported, enter the password for decryption, andspecify Key cryptography and Confirm key cryptography.

8. Click Submit in the Network Security Certificate area.

----End

8.1.10 How Can I Install a Device Access Certificate?

Context● You have obtained a device access certificate and the certificate key and have

copied the certificate and key file to the PC.● A preset certificate is provided for the ECC800-Pro and its connected devices.

If a higher security level is required, replace the certificate both on theECC800-Pro and the devices.

● You need to apply for a device access certificate from an organizationauthorized by the customer, and replace the original certificate on the devicesand ECC800-Pro.

● This section describes how to import a certificate to the ECC800-Pro. Fordetails about how to import a certificate to devices, see the operation manualof the devices.



Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > Device Management > Security Certificate Change.

Step 3 Click Select File on the right of Upload CA certificate file.

Step 4 Select the certificate to be imported from the PC and click Upload.

Step 5 Click Select File on the right of Upload local certificate file.

Step 6 Select the certificate to be imported from the PC and click Upload.

Step 7 Click Select File on the right of Upload key file.

Step 8 Select the key file to be imported from the PC and click Upload.

Step 9 Specify Key cryptography and Confirm key cryptography.


----End

8.1.11 How Can I Change the ECC800-Pro IP Address on theWebUI?

ContextYou have obtained the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway informationplanned for the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > System Parameters > Monitor IP and change the IP,subnet mask, and default gateway information for the ECC800-Pro as planned.


Step 4 In the displayed Setting succeeded. Log in again. dialog box, click OK.

----End

8.1.12 How Can I Configure ECC800-Pro Alarm Parameters?

Context● You can set parameters under Enable Alarm, Severity, Output Dry Contact

and Loudspeaker based on requirements.– When Enable Alarm is set to Disable for an alarm, the ECC800-Pro will

not show this alarm.– You can set Severity to Critical, Major, Minor, or Warning as required.– After an alarm and a DO output are associated over Output Dry

Contact, the device connected to the DO port will act if the alarm isgenerated.



– If an alarm is associated with the loudspeaker and Loudspeaker is set toYes, the loudspeaker produces sound when the alarm is generated.

● You can modify alarm parameters in batches over Batch Setting.● The setting methods for different alarms are the same. This section describes

how to set the Operation log full alarm for the ECC800-Pro.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameters.

Step 3 On the Basic Alarm Parameters page, choose ECC800 from the Select a devicetype drop-down list box, choose the ECC800 to be set from the Device namedrop-down list box, and then click Confirm.

Step 4 Set Enable Alarm to Enable or Disable for Operation log full as required. SetSeverity to Critical, Major, Minor, or Warning as required.

NO TE

To modify Enable Alarm or Severity in batches, click Batch Setting in the left corner ofthe Basic Alm Para page, and choose ECC800 from the Select a device type drop-downlist box. Set Destination Parameter of Enable Alarm or Source Parameter andDestination Parameter of Severity, and click OK.

Step 5 Enter the Alarm Linkage page. Select Device Type for ECC800, select DeviceType or Device for Linkage Type, and click Confirm.

Step 6 (Optional) If you select Device for Linkage type, select ECC800 for Device name.

Step 7 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact column corresponding to Operation logfull as required, select Yes or No for DO, and click OK.

Step 8 Click Select in the Loudspeaker column corresponding to Operation log full asrequired, set Loudspeaker to Yes or No, and click OK.

----End

8.1.13 How Can I View Real-Time Monitoring Data, ActiveAlarms, Historical Alarms, Access Event, and Operation Logs?

Procedure


Step 2 Click Monitoring, select the device to be viewed, and select Running Info to viewthe real-time data of the device.

Step 3 Choose Home > Active Alarms to view the active alarms of the ECC800-Pro. ClickDetails in the Alarm Details area to view alarm details of devices.

Step 4 Choose Query to view the historical alarms, access events, and operation logs ofthe device.1. View historical alarms, choose Query > Historical Alarms. Set Device, Start

time, End time, Sort mode and Sorting By, and click Query.



2. To view access events, choose Query > Access Event.

3. To view operation logs, choose Query > Operation Log.

----End

8.1.14 How Can I Handle Alarms?

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Step 2 Choose Home > Active Alarms and view active alarms.

Step 3 Select an alarm to be acknowledged and click Confirm.

Figure 8-20 Acknowledging an alarm

Step 4 Handle an alarm based on the alarm information.

Step 5 Select an alarm to be cleared and click Clear Alarm.

NO TE

The cleared alarm is displayed in the historical alarm list.

----End

8.1.15 How Can I View Performance Data?

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Query > Performance Data.

Step 3 Set Device, Performance Data, Statistics Mode, Start time, and End Time, andclick Query.

NO TE

The query result can be displayed in Table or Curve mode.

----End



8.1.16 How Can I Change a Signal Name?

Context● In this example, the smoke sensor is connected to the AI/DI_3 port on the

ECC800-Pro.● The following procedure describes how to change the signal name of AI/DI_3.

Other signal names can be changed in a similar way.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose System Settings > Signal Name Modify. The Batch SignalConfiguration page is displayed.

Step 3 Set Device type to ECC800, set Device name to ECC800, and click OK.

Step 4 On the query result tab page, set the new signal name of AI/DI_3 to Smoke andclick Submit.

Step 5 Choose Monitoring > System > ECC800 > Running Parameters > AI/DI_3 PortSettings. Check that the signal name of AI/DI_3 has been changed to Smoke.

NO TE

After the signal name is changed, the original name in the alarm, collection, and settings ischanged accordingly.

----End

8.1.17 How Can I Export Historical Data and Device Data?

Context● Export Historical Data: You can export historical alarms, active alarms,

performance data, operation logs, and access events of the system for viewingand analyzing events.

● Export Device Data: You can export device data in system.● If Encryption Password is selected, the exported data package will be

encrypted, and you need to enter the encryption password to decompress thedata package. To ensure data security, you are advised to select Encryptionpassword.

Procedure


Step 2 Select Query > Export Data.

Step 3 (Optional) Select Encryption password and enter an encryption password.

NO TE

Record the password for decompressing the data package.



Step 4 Export historical data and local data of southbound devices, and select a save pathto save the exported data to the PC.

Figure 8-21 Exporting data

NO TE

● Data can be exported from the integrated PDU, integrated UPS, iBOX, smart coolingproduct, and other devices that have the local data storage function.

● If a USB flash drive is inserted, click Export Historical Data or Export Local Data ofSouthbound Devices of Southbound Devices, and specify a save path to save exporteddata to the USB flash drive.

----End

8.1.18 How Can I Export or Import a Configuration File?

Context

You can export parameter configurations for ECC800-Pro_1 to a PC. If ECC800-Pro_2 needs the same parameter configurations, import the configuration file toECC800-Pro_2.

NO TICE

● ECC800-Pro_2 and ECC800-Pro_1 must have the same type and number ofconnected devices.

● Configuration files cannot be imported or exported for the monitoring moduleIP parameters, smart module certificate, NetEco certificate, NetEco second-challenge password, time configuration parameters, access user management,access permission management, device access certificate, logs, and userconfiguration information.

Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro_1 WebUI as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Configuration File.

Step 3 Export a configuration file.1. Specify Configuration file encryption password.



NO TE

Record the password for importing a configuration file.

2. Click Back Up Current Settings.

Step 4 Import a configuration file.

NO TICE

● Before importing the configuration file, ensure that the current system type isthe same as the system type when the configuration file is exported.

● The ECC800-Pro_2 will restart after you import the configuration file.

1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro_2 WebUI as an administrator.2. Choose Maintenance > Configuration File.3. Specify Configuration file decryption password.4. Click Select File on the right of Import configuration file.5. Select the configuration file to be imported, and click Upload.

----End

8.1.19 How Can I Export Fault Information?

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Fault Information.

Step 3 (Optional) Select Encryption password and enter an encryption password.

NO TICE

If Encryption Password is selected, the exported data package will be encrypted,and you need to enter the encryption password to decompress the data package.To ensure data security, you are advised to select Encryption password.

NO TE

Record the password for decompressing the data package.

Step 4 Export fault information and save the exported data to the PC or USB flash drive.



Figure 8-22 Exporting information to PC

Figure 8-23 Exporting information to USB flash drive

----End

8.1.20 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?

Context● Do not delete the source devices before replacing devices.

● After replacing devices, you can choose to synchronize configured deviceparameters to the target devices.

● Source device: device before replacement

● Target device: device after replacement

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Maintenance > Parameter Sync.

Step 3 Select a value from the Device type drop-down list box.

Step 4 Specify source device and target device, click Submit.

NO TICE

If communication between the ECC800-Pro and the device is interrupted duringparameter synchronization, the synchronization fails. Ensure that the ECC800-Proand the device communicate properly and synchronize parameters again.



NO TE

The source device can be a device that communicates properly or fails to communicate, but thetarget device must be a device that communicates properly.

----End

8.1.21 What Should I Do If the ECC800-Pro WebUI DisplayLanguage Changes from Chinese to English During Use?

ContextCause: The browser cookies are deleted.

Procedure

Step 1 Manually refresh the browser page.

----End

8.1.22 What Should I Do If the ECC800-Pro Fails toCommunicate with the UPS5000-E?

Procedure

Step 1 Tap System Info on the LCD after the UPS is started.

Step 2 Choose System Info > Settings, enter the user name and password, and tap

.

NO TE

The preset user name is admin and the preset password is 000001.

Step 3 Choose Settings > Advanced and set Modbus TCP encryption to Disable.

----End

8.1.23 What Should I Do if I Forget the ECC800 IP Address?

Procedure

Step 1 If the ECC800 has been connected to the NMS, you can query the IP address onthe NMS.

Step 2 If the ECC800 is not connected to the NMS, hold down the SW button on theECC800 for 1 minute to restore the default IP address.

WARNING

Press and hold down the SW button for 1 minute to restore factory settings andclear user information. Exercise caution when performing this operation.



Figure 8-24 SW button

----End

8.1.24 What Should I Do If a Message Indicating UnauthorizedFingerprint Is Displayed During Fingerprint Scanning on theAccess Control Device (Fingerprint Has Been Recorded)?

Procedure

Step 1 Ensure that no obstacles exist in front of the fingerprint, and then scan thefingerprint on the access control device again.

Step 2 If the message is still displayed after you perform Step 1, synchronize thefingerprint information.1. Choose System Settings > Access Management. On the Authorization

Operations tab page, click Synchronize to Device, select the device forsynchronizing fingerprint information, and click Start Synchronization.

2. After the Synchronization Status of the device becomes Synchronized, closethe Synchronize Access Permission page.

3. Scan the fingerprint on the access control device again.

Step 3 If the message indicating unauthorized fingerprint is still displayed after youperform Step 1 and Step 2, you need to record the user's fingerprint again.1. Choose System Settings > Access Management.2. Select the involved user and record the fingerprint again.

----End

8.1.25 How Can I Rectify Camera Access Restriction?

PrerequisitesIf Huawei S12700 series switch is used, refer to this section to rectify the fault. Formore information, consult network engineers.

ContextThe camera is inaccessible after the MAC address and IP address are bound innetwork configuration.



Procedure

Step 1 Configure the free-rule MAC address using the free-rule configuration method sothat users can access the network without authentication. For details, see section"authentication free-rule" in the S12700 V200R008C00 Product Documentation.

----End

8.1.26 How Can I Add the Devices Accessed Through a SmartETH Gateway to the ECC800-Pro WebUI (Modbus-TCP)?

Prerequisites

The device supports DHCP.

Context

Figure 8-25 Network diagram

Procedure

Step 1 Ensure that the device communication mode has been set to DHCP.

Step 2 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator, and check whether thedevice exists on the Monitoring page.

● If the device exists, and communication status is normal, the device hasaccessed the ECC800-Pro successfully.



Figure 8-26 Device accessed the ECC800-Pro

● If the device does not exist, check that the cable is properly connectedbetween the device and the ECC800-Pro, the ECC800-Pro is operatingproperly, and communications parameters are set correctly.

----End

Follow-up Procedure

Choose Home > Plan View on the ECC800-Pro WebUI, and drag the device to thecorresponding position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actualdevice layout.

8.1.27 How Can I Add the Devices Accessed Through a SmartETH Gateway to the ECC800-Pro WebUI (Modbus-MAC)?

Context

The device that supports Modbus-MAC can be automatically identified by theECC800-Pro.




Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator, and check whether thedevice exists on the Monitoring page.

The following is an example of confirming the access of a WiFi converter.

● If the device exists, and communication status is normal, the device hasaccessed the ECC800-Pro successfully.

Figure 8-28 Device accessed the ECC800-Pro

● If the device does not exist, check that the cable is properly connectedbetween the device and the ECC800-Pro and that the device and ECC800-Proare operating properly.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureChoose Home > Plan View on the ECC800-Pro WebUI, and drag the device to thecorresponding position in the Smart Module View pane based on the actualdevice layout.



8.1.28 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ETHConverter to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Context


Procedure

Step 1 Set communications parameters on the device.

Table 8-40 Description of communications parameters to be set on a device

Parameter Recommended Value

Baud rate This section uses 9600 as an example. Set thisparameter based on site requirements.NOTE

For certain devices, this parameter does not need to be set.

Communicationsaddress

This section uses 1 as an example. Set this parameterbased on site requirements.

Step 2 Add the device to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.


2. Add the device.



Table 8-41 Parameter description for adding a device



Deviceattribute

Select the device attribute to be accessedfrom the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select the device type to be accessed fromthe drop-down list box.

Connect To Select the corresponding ETH converterfrom the drop-down list box.NOTE

Use the blinking function of the ETH converterto identify the mapping between the device andthe ETH converter.

Communications Port

COM1/COM2

DeviceAddress

This section uses 1 as an example. Inpractice, set this parameter to be the sameas the communications address for thedevice.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the device connects to the ECC800-Pro

properly.– If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800-Pro

successfully, click Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in theNumber of connected devices list.



----End


8.1.29 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800-Pro COM Port to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

PrerequisitesThis section uses the device connecting to the COM1 port on the ECC800-Pro asan example.



Context


Procedure








Step 2 Add the device to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add the device.



ChooseSystemSettings >DeviceManagementand click AddDevice. Theparametersfor adding

Deviceattribute

Select the device attribute to be accessedfrom the drop-down list box.

Device Type Select the device type to be accessed fromthe drop-down list box.





devices aredisplayed.

Communications Port


The setting example indicates that the deviceconnects to the COM1 port on the ECC800-Pro.If the device connects to another port, enter thenumber of the connected port.

DeviceAddress

This section uses 1 as an example. Inpractice, set this parameter to be the sameas the communications address for thedevice.

3. Click Test Connect to check whether the device connects to the ECC800-Pro

properly.– If the independent deployment AI_DI unit connects to the ECC800-Pro

successfully, click Confirm. The connected devices are displayed in theNumber of connected devices list.


----End


8.1.30 How Can I Add Devices Accessed Through the ECC800-Pro AI/DI Port to the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

PrerequisitesThis section uses the device connecting to the AI/DI_3 port on the ECC800-Pro asan example.



Context


The AI/DI_1, AI/DI_2, and AI/DI_3 ports on the ECC800-Pro can be automaticallyidentified by devices, but the AI/DI_4 and AI/DI_5 ports cannot be automaticallyidentified.

Procedure


Step 2 Add the device.



Monitoring >System > ECC800> RunningParameters > AI/DI_3 PortSettingsNOTE

The settingexample indicatesthat the deviceconnects to theAI/DI_3 port onthe ECC800-Pro. Ifthe deviceconnects toanother port,enter the numberof the connectedport.

AI/DI_3sensor

Select Enable and click Submit

AI/DI_3sensor type

Select the type of the device to be accessedfrom the drop-down list box.NOTE

Devices except the normally open devices,normally closed devices, door status switch, andwater sensor (electrode-type) can beautomatically identified after they areconnected.




Monitoring >System > ECC800> RunningParameters > AI/DI_3 PortSettings, clickUnhide AllAdvancedSignals, clickPower SupplyParameters.

II powersupplyenable(AIDI_3/COM2/AIDI_5)

The default value is Enable.

Step 3 After setting all mandatory parameters, click Submit.

----End


8.1.31 How Can I Add an RS485 Device Connected to theECC800-Pro Through a UIM20A?

PrerequisitesThis section uses the device (such as a T/H sensor, rPDU, cabinet electronic lock,and U-bit manager) connecting to the COM1 port on the UIM20A expansionmodule as an example.

Procedure








Step 2 Add the device to the ECC800-Pro WebUI.



1. Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI as an administrator.2. Add the device.

Choose System Settings > Device Management and click Auto DiscoverDevice to add the device. The device connection information is displayed.


----End

8.1.32 How Can I Add a Dry Contact Device Connected to theECC800-Pro Through a UIM20A Expansion Module?

PrerequisitesThis section uses the device (such as a door status sensor) connecting to the AI/DI_3 port on the UIM20A expansion module as an example.

ContextEach UIM20A expansion module supports a maximum of eight dry contactdevices. In the scenario with multiple UIMs in the same smart module, amaximum of 48 dry contact devices can be connected.

Procedure


Step 2 Add the device.



Monitoring >System > UIMGroup > UIM1 >AI/DI_3 PortSettings

AI/DI_3sensor

Select Enable and click Submit




NOTEThe settingexample indicatesthat the deviceconnects to theAI/DI_3 port onthe UIM1. If thedevice connects toanother port,enter the numberof the connectedport.

AI/DI_3sensor type

Select the type of the device to be accessedfrom the drop-down list box.

Monitoring >System > UIMGroup > UIM1 >RunningParameters, clickUnhide AllAdvancedSignals, clickPower SupplyParameters.

II powersupplyenable(COM3/AIDI_3/COM4/AIDI_4)

The default value is Enable.

Step 3 After setting all mandatory parameters, click Submit.

----End

Follow-up ProcedureChoose Home > Plan View on the ECC800-Pro WebUI, and drag the dry contactdevice to the corresponding position in the Smart Module View pane based onthe actual device layout.

8.1.33 How Can I Open Doors Remotely over the ECC800-ProWebUI?

ContextIf O&M personnel need to enter a smart module but do not take an access cord orforget the password, you can open the door remotely over the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Procedure


Step 2 Open the aisle door.



Table 8-47 Opening a door remotely

Path Setting

Monitoring > Aisle >Access Actuator Group >Access Actuator n >Controls

Select Remote door opening and click Submit

CA UTION

● Remotely opening the door may open the smart module door, and this maypose security risks. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

● When a smart module actuator is configured, you need to set parameters forthe smart module actuator. The setting process is similar.

----End

Example

The following figure shows how to remotely open the aisle door controlled byaccess actuator 1.

Figure 8-33 Opening a door remotely

8.1.34 How Can I Turn On or Off Aisle Lights in the SmartModule over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Context● If O&M personnel forget to turn off lights when exiting the data center, you

can remotely turn off the lights over the ECC800-Pro WebUI.● When the local light button is faulty or lights cannot be turned on through a

linkage, you can remotely turn on the lights over the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Procedure


Step 2 Turn on or off aisle lights.



Table 8-48 Turning on or off aisle lights

Path Setting

Monitoring > Aisle > ACActuator Group > ACActuator n > RunningParameters

Set Route 1 control mode to Light.Set Set light mode to Manual.

Monitoring > Aisle > ACActuator Group > ACActuator n > Controls

Select Remote open scuttle, select ON or OFF asrequired, and click Submit.

----End

Example

The following figure shows how to turn on or off the lights controlled by ACactuator 2.

Figure 8-34 Turning on or off aisle lights

Follow-up Procedure

Set Set light mode to Automatic.

CA UTION

When a smart module actuator is configured, you need to set parameters for thesmart module actuator. The setting process is similar.

8.1.35 How Can I Open Skylights Remotely over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Context

You can open skylights over the ECC800-Pro WebUI in emergencies.



Procedure


Step 2 Open skylights.

Table 8-49 Opening skylights

Path Setting

Monitoring > Aisle >Skylight Actuator Group >Skylight Actuator n >Controls

Select Remote open scuttle and click Submit

CA UTION

● Remotely opening the skylight may open the smart module skylight, and thismay pose security risks. Exercise caution when performing this operation.

● When a smart module actuator is configured, you need to set parameters forthe smart module actuator. The setting process is similar.

----End

ExampleThe following figure shows how to open the skylights controlled by skylightactuator 1.

Figure 8-35 Opening skylights

Follow-up ProcedureAfter the maintenance is complete, O&M personnel need to close the skylights inthe smart module manually.



8.1.36 How Can I Turn On or Off Smart Cooling Products overthe ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Context

You can turn on or off smart cooling products over the ECC800-Pro WebUI inemergencies.

Procedure


Step 2 Turn on or off smart cooling products.

Table 8-50 Turning on or off smart cooling products

Path Setting

Monitoring > Cooling >NetCol n > Controls

Select On/Off control, select ON or OFF asrequired, and click Submit.

----End

Example

The following figure shows how to turn on or off the NetCol5000-A025.

Figure 8-36 Turning on or off smart cooling products

8.1.37 How Can I Open the Cabinet Electronic Lock over theECC800-Pro WebUI?

Context

When O&M personnel need to open a cabinet for maintenance, you can open thecabinet electronic lock over the ECC800-Pro WebUI.

Procedure




Step 2 Open the cabinet electronic lock.

Table 8-51 Opening a cabinet electronic lock

Path Operation

Monitoring > Cabinet > ITCabinet n > E-LOCK n

Select Remote and click Submit.

----End

Example

The following figure shows how to open electronic lock 1 for IT cabinet 1.

Figure 8-37 Opening a cabinet electronic lock

Follow-up Procedure

After the maintenance is complete, O&M personnel need to close the cabinet doormanually.

8.1.38 How Can I Link the Smoke Alarm with the AlarmBeacon over the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Prerequisites

The alarm beacon is connected to the DO port on the ECC800-Pro.

Context

After the smoke alarm is linked with the alarm beacon, if smoke is detected insidethe smart module, the alarm beacon connecting to the corresponding DO port willgenerate an audible and visual alarm.



Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameter > Alarm Linkage.

Step 2 Select Multi-Func Sensor for Device Type, select Device Type or Device forLinkage type, and click Confirm.

NO TE

Select Multi-Func Sensor n from the Device Name list if you have selected Device forLinkage type, and click Confirm.

Step 3 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact list for Smoke alarm. On the Set DryContact Outputs(Multi-Func Sensor) page, set DO to Yes and click OK.

Step 4 Click Select in the loudspeaker list for Smoke alarm. On the Please set thesound(Multi-Func Sensor) page, set loudspeaker to Yes and click OK.

----End

8.1.39 How Can I Link the AI/DI Alarm with the Alarm Beaconover the ECC800-Pro WebUI?

Prerequisites

The alarm beacon is connected to the DO port on the ECC800-Pro.

Context

After the AI/DI alarm is linked with the alarm beacon, if smoke is detected insidethe smart module, the alarm beacon connecting to the corresponding DO port willgenerate an audible and visual alarm.

This section describes how to set an alarm linkage by linking output dry contact ofthe smoke DI alarm on the AI/DI_1 sensor to the DO port.

Procedure

Step 1 Choose System Settings > Alarm Parameter > Alarm Linkage.

Step 2 Select ECC800 for Device type, select Device Type or Device for Linkage type,and click Confirm.

NO TE

Select ECC800 from the Device name list if you have selected Device for Linkage type,and click Confirm.

Step 3 Click Select in the Output Dry Contact list for AI/DI_1 DI alarm. On the Set DryContact Outputs(ECC800) page, set DO to Yes and click OK.

Step 4 Click Select in the loudspeaker list for AI/DI_1 DI alarm. On the Please set thesound(ECC800) page, set loudspeaker to Yes and click OK.

----End



8.1.40 How Can I Modify Device Names over the ECC800-ProWebUI?

Context● When a device name does not correspond to the actual location or needs

optimizing, you can modify the device name over the ECC800-Pro WebUI.● The following describes how to modify the name of the smart ETH gateway.

Procedure


Step 2 Modify the device name.

Table 8-52 Modifying a device name

Path Setting

Monitoring > System >Smart ETH GatewayGroup > Smart ETHGateway 1 > RunningParameters

Select Device name, enter the new name in thetext box as planned, and click Submit.

----End

Example

Figure 8-38 Modifying a device name

8.2 APP Operations

8.2.1 How Can I Connect to a WiFi Network?

Procedure

Step 1 Connecting to a WiFi network.

Insert a WiFi module into the USB port on the ECC800-Pro.



Figure 8-39 Installing a WiFi module

----End

8.2.2 How Can I Prepare and Log In to the App?

PrerequisitesApp operating environment requirements:● The mobile device must run Android 4.0 or later and is not root operating

system (the operating system is not flashed).● The mobile device has sufficient battery reserve.● You have obtained the IP address of the ECC800-Pro as well as the user name


Pro is prepared, and the PC has connected to port WAN1 on the ECC800-Pro.

ProcedureStep 1 Download and obtain the app installation package using any of the following

three methods:● Log in to Huawei AppGallery (https://a.vmall.com/), search for

FusionModule, and tap Download.a. (Optional) Set the pad language to English.b. Open the browser on the pad, enter www.baidu.com in the address box,

search for Huawei AppGallery, select Ordinary Download, and tapSave.

c. Install the Huawei AppGallery. If the downloaded file exists in the drop-down list box, tap the file to install the Huawei AppGallery. If thedownloaded file does not exist in the drop-down list box, choose File >Local on the desktop, find the Download folder, and tap the HuaweiAppGallery installation package.

NO TICE

After you open the Huawei AppGallery, select NOT NOW if "NewVersion" is displayed.



http://a.vmall.com/

http://a.vmall.com/

● Log in to the ECC800-Pro WebUI using a PC. Choose Maintenance > AppObtaining, scan QR code, and save the app installation package to the PC ora path on the mobile storage device. Then, copy the app installation packageto a mobile phone or pad.

● When the WiFi is enabled, enter https://192.168.245.10 in the address bar ofthe Firefox browser (version 41.0 or later) on a mobile phone or pad, andpress Enter to access the ECC800-Pro WebUI. Choose Maintenance > AppObtaining and scan QR code to save the app package to the mobile phone orpad.

Step 2 Install the app.

By default, the Android operating system forbids the installation of apps notobtained from the Android market. Therefore, before installing the app, set themobile phone so that it allows the installation of apps from unknown sources.

1. Tap the app installation file for installation. After the installation is complete,

check that the app icon is displayed on the home screen of the mobilephone or pad.

Step 3 Hold down the SW button on the ECC800-Pro for less than 3s to enable the WiFifunction.

NO TE

● The initial password is Changeme after the WiFi function is enabled. The password isvalid only after you hold down the button for the first time to enable the WiFi function.If you enable the WiFi function on the WebUI, there is no preset password.

● After the WiFi function is enabled, the password for a mobile phone to connect to theWiFi network is Changeme. When you log in to the app using a pad, the systemprompts you to change the password.

● After you disable the WiFi hotspot function on the WebUI and press the button again,the WiFi function is still enabled. In this case, the WiFi password is the one you changedlast time.

● The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function, changethe WiFi password to ensure connection security.

● A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi password once half ayear.

Step 4 (Optional) Enable the WiFi function on the ECC800-Pro WebUI.


2. Choose Monitoring > System > WiFi Converter and click WiFiManagement.

3. Set Enable WiFi to Enable and click Submit.

4. If this is the first time you enable the WiFi function, set WiFi Password andclick OK.

5. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and clickSubmit.

6. Specify WiFi SSID and WiFi Password and click Submit to change the SSIDand password.



NO TE

– If you have set a password when enabling WiFi for the first time, you do not needto set the password again.

– The WiFi function is disabled by default. If you need to enable the WiFi function,change the WiFi password to ensure connection security.

– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen orcracked. The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the WiFi passwordonce half a year.

7. Enter the password currently used for logging in to the WebUI and clickSubmit.

Step 5 Log in to the app.

1. Start the mobile phone or pad app, choose Settings > Network Connectionon the login screen, select WiFi SSID specified on the WebUI, and enter thevalue of WiFi Password specified on the WebUI for login.

2. On the login screen, choose Settings > Server IP Settings, and ensure thatthe IP address is 192.168.245.10.

3. The user name and login password for the app are the same as those for theECC800-Pro WebUI. Specify the user name and password, and tap Login.

NO TE

– After the first login, change the password in time to ensure system access security.

– When the mobile phone app connects to the monitoring system, the WiFi function ofthe monitoring system is disabled by default. Before connecting the mobile phone appto the monitoring system, enable the WiFi function on the WebUI. For security, you areadvised to disable the WiFi function when the app is not in use.

– A password that has been used for a long time is more likely to be stolen or cracked.The risk increases along with the time of use. Change the password once three months.

– You are advised to use a mobile phone that has not been rooted to reduce the risk ofinformation leakage.

– It is recommended that you use different user names to log in to both the ECC800-ProWebUI and app at the same time. If you use the same user name to log in to theWebUI and app at the same time, either of them will be forcibly logged out.

----End

8.2.3 How Can I Ensure that Device Positions in the Plan ViewAre Consistent with Actual Positions?

Prerequisites

The smart module plan view has been created, and the device positions in theplan view are consistent with actual positions.

Context

The rack environment unit is used as an example.



Procedure

Step 1 Log in to the ECC800-Pro mobile phone or pad app as an administrator.

Step 2 Choose Home > More > iFind.

Step 3 Tap Cabinet Collector n Blink to deliver a blinking command. The correspondingdevice in the smart module blinks. Check that the device positions and types in theplan view are consistent with the actual situation by delivering the blinkingcommand.

Figure 8-40 Rack environment unit blinking

----End

8.2.4 How Can I View Real-time Data?

Procedure


Step 2 To view the smart module data center layout, tap Home.

Step 3 To view active alarms and historical alarms, choose Alarms > Active Alarms orAlarms > Historical Alarms.

Step 4 Choose More to view network parameters, operation logs, asset details, andversion information.

----End

8.2.5 How Can I Export and Import Data?

Procedure


Step 2 Export device configuration data or historical data.1. Choose More > Export Data.



2. Select Local or USB from the Select export location drop-down list box.

3. (Optional) Select Select the encryption mode and enter an encryptionpassword.

4. Select a value from the drop-down list box in the Export DeviceConfiguration Data or Export Historical Data area.

5. Tap Export.

Step 3 Export the current configuration file.

1. Choose More > Export Data.

2. Enter the encryption password and click Export.

Step 4 Import data.

1. Choose More > Import Data.

2. Select Local or USB from the Select import location drop-down list box.

3. The configuration file is encrypted, enter the password in the DecryptionPassword text box.

4. Select a configuration file and tap Import.

NO TE

The ECC800-Pro will restart after you import the configuration file.

----End

8.2.6 How Can I Synchronize Device Parameters?

Context

After a device is replaced, you can synchronize the parameters of the originaldevice to the new device.

Procedure


Step 2 Choose Parameter Sync.

Step 3 Select the source device and target device.

● Source device: device before replacement

● Target device: device after replacement

Step 4 Complete the operation.

● Tap Submit on the pad app.

● Tap Finish on the mobile phone app.

----End



8.2.7 How Can I Handle App Login Failure?

ContextIf the message The IP is already used is displayed when you attempt to log in tothe mobile phone or pad app, perform the operations in this section to handle theissue.

Procedure

Step 1 If you have obtained the user name and password used in the previous successfullogin, perform the following operations:1. Check that the mobile phone or pad connects to the ECC800-Pro over WiFi

properly.2. Use the obtained user name and password to log in to the app and exit.3. Use the user name and password that previously failed the login to log in to

the app again.

Step 2 If you have not obtained the user name and password used in a previoussuccessful login, perform the following operations:1. Close the app and wait 4–5 minutes.2. Use the user name and password that previously failed the login to log in to

the app again.

----End



9 PLC Function

9.1 Linkage Control IntroductionThe ECC800-Pro provides the linkage control function. You can set logic rules andcontrol the DO output signal by collecting the signal value.

You can select signals (such as the AI/DI device status signals) and perform logicoperations such as AND, OR, NOT, GREATER THAN, LESS THAN, DELAY, andFILTER. The operation result can be provided to the dry contact to meet the sitecontrol requirements.

Logic ParametersThe following are the inputs, operators, and outputs for linkage control logicprograms:

● Inputs:– Sample: such as AI/DI device signals– Alarm: such as AI/DI alarm signals– Constant– Register: A register can combine multiple levels of logic programs.

● Operators:– AND: The output is valid if both inputs are valid.– OR: The output is valid if either input is valid.– NOT: The output is the inverse value of the input signal or constant.– >: The output is active if the input is greater than the constant.– <: The output is active if the input is less than the constant.– DELAY: The output of the input signal or constant is delayed and the

output is constant.– FILTER: The output is active if the input reaches the constant.

● Outputs:– Outputs are associated with dry contact outputs and can be used for

generating alarms or controlling devices.

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 9 PLC Function


– Register: A register can combine multiple levels of logic programs.– Alarm: The operation result is generated as a new alarm.

Feature Description

The linkage control configuration is concise and easy to operate. You can performthe following operations:

● Configure linkage control logic programs on the WebUI for display.● Import or export configuration files.● Restore the default linkage control configuration by one click.

The following are descriptions of the WebUI:

● Basic Parameters: The configurations of the linkage control logic programsare valid if Enable linkage control function is set to Yes.

● Linkage group: You can configure Linkage groups by type.● Linkage Logical List: You can configure logic program lines.● Import and Export: You can import or export configuration files to generate

logic program lines in batches.● Restore configuration: You can click Restore Factory Defaults to restore the

default linkage control configurations.

9.2 Linkage Control Configuration Examples

Context

NO TICE

● Linkage control does not need to be configured onsite and its defaultconfiguration applies. Before adding or modifying linkage control linkage logic,consult Huawei engineers.

● When you do not know how to rectify the incorrect linkage controlconfiguration or want to synchronize the linkage control configuration fromanother ECC800-Pro, use the linkage control configuration import and exportfunction.

● The ECC800-Pro supports fire control linkage and high temperature linkagecontrol. For example, the ECC800-Pro can implement fire linkage by detectingfire alarms through the fire controller and opening the skylight, opening theaisle door, and shutting down the smart cooling product based on the alarmstatus.

● The following describes how to configure the linkage control linkage, usingLink fire control with skylight open as an example.

● In this example, the fire controller connects to port AI/DI_1. The actual portprevails.



Procedure




Step 4 Add or edit a linkage group name.1. On the Linkage Group tab page, click Add.2. In the displayed Add Logical Group dialog box, set Group name to Link fire

extinguishing with skylight open.3. Click OK.

NO TE

For details about how to add or edit a linkage group name for high temperature linkage control,see Step 4.

Step 5 Add or edit a logic program.1. Select the edited linkage group name on the Linkage Group tab page.

2. On the Linkage Logic List tab page, click Add or the edit icon .3. Click Submit.● Set Linkage Logic List parameters for Link fire control with skylight open.

Figure 9-1 Setting parameters for Linkage Logic List

● Set Linkage Logic List parameters for Link high temperature with skylightopen.

NO TE

When adding high temperature linkage control, ensure that all smart cooling products failto communicate with the ECC800-Pro. If smart cooling products communicate properly,cooling can be automatically implemented when the smart cooling products are at hightemperature. Opening the skylights may cause the cooling effect to fail.

Figure 9-2 Parameters for connecting to the temperature sensor



Figure 9-3 Parameters for connecting to the temperature and humidity sensor

----End

Follow-up ProcedureYou can use the configuration file import and export function to export thelinkage control linkage rules configured for an ECC800-Pro to a local PC and thenimport the rules to another ECC800-Pro. This function achieves quick configurationfor the linkage control.



10 Acronyms and Abbreviations

A

AC alternating current

AES Advanced encryption standard

AI analog input

APP application

B

BCB battery control I/O board

C

COM component object model

D

DC direct current

DES Data Encryption Standard

DI digital input

DO digital output

E

ECC Energy Control Center

ESN equipment serial number

ETH Ethernet

F

FE Fast Ethernet

ECC800 Data Center ControllerUser Manual (for ECC800-Pro) 10 Acronyms and Abbreviations


GGE

Gigabit Ethernet

I

iBAT iBattery

IC integrated circuit

iCooling iCooling

IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IP Internet Protocol

IT Internet technology

L

LED light emitting diode

M

MTBF mean time between failures

MTTR mean time to repair

MAC Media Access Control

MD5 message digest algorithm

Mib Mib

N

NAT network address translation

NetEco iManager NetEco data center infrastructuremanagement system

NTC negative temperature coefficient

P

PDU power distribution unit

POE power over Ethernet

PSU power supply unit

PUE power usage effectiveness

R

RF radio frequency

RH relative humidity



RJ Registered Jack

RoHS restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances

S

SD secure digital

SHA SecureHashAlgorithm

SIM subscriber identity module

SMS short message service

SMTP Simple Mail Transfer Protocol

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SSL Secure Sockets Layer

SSID service set identifier

T

TLS Transport Layer Security

U

UPS uninterruptible power system

USB universal serial bus

V

VCN video cloud node

W

WiFi wireless fidelity

WPS WiFi protected setup



huawei - ecc800 data center controller v100r003c00 ......implemented by hardware such as the ups and...

Documents